manualshive.com logo in svg

HP StorageWorks MSA 2/8 - SAN Switch, Reference Manual

The HP StorageWorks MSA 2/8 - SAN Switch is a high-performance product designed to enhance your storage network. Ensure a smooth installation process with the comprehensive Installation Manual available for free download on our website. Unlock its full potential with this user-friendly manual, available at manualshive.com.

Share
Download
background image

cfgAdd

97

Fabric OS Version 3.1.x/4.1.x Reference Guide

Add a member to a zone configuration.

Synopsis

cfgAdd “cfgName”,”member;member”

Availability

Admin

Release

V3.1.x and V4.1.x

Description

Use this command to add one or more members to an existing zone.

This command changes the Defined Configuration. For the change to be preserved 
across switch reboots, it must be saved to non-volatile memory using the

 

cfgSave 

command. For the change to become effective, an appropriate zone 

configuration must be enabled using the

 cfgEnable 

command.

Note:  

This command requires an Advanced Zoning license.

When security is enabled, this command can only be issued from the Primary FCS 

switch. See “

Security Commands

” on page 941.

cfgAdd

Summary of Contents for StorageWorks MSA 2/8 - SAN Switch

Page 1: ...1 x Third Edition June 2003 Part Number AA RS24C TE This reference guide provides a detailed description of the Fabric OS commands Although this guide is primarily about 4 1 x it also covers 3 1 x that runs on the StorageWorks SAN Switch 2 16 2 16 power pak 2 8 EL and 2 8 power pack switches ...

Page 2: ... weave logo Brocade the Intelligent Platform for Networking Storage SilkWorm and SilkWorm Express are trademarks or registered trademarks of Brocade Communications Systems Inc or its subsidiaries in the United States and or in other countries Java is a U S trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc Microsoft Windows and Windows NT are U S registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation UNIX is a registered ...

Page 3: ...Conventions 17 Text Symbols 17 Getting Help 19 HP Technical Support 19 HP Storage Website 19 HP Authorized Reseller 20 1 Fabric OS Commands 21 agtcfgDefault 22 agtcfgSet 26 agtcfgShow 32 aliasDelete 36 aliasJoin 38 aliasPurge 40 aliasShow 42 aliAdd 44 aliCreate 46 aliDelete 49 aliRemove 51 aliShow 53 backplanetest 55 backPort 58 backSpace 62 bannerset 63 bannershow 65 ...

Page 4: ...vshow 95 cfgAdd 97 cfgClear 99 cfgCreate 101 cfgDelete 103 cfgDisable 105 cfgEnable 107 cfgRemove 109 cfgSave 111 cfgShow 113 cfgsize 117 cfgTransAbort 119 cfgtransshow 121 chassisName 123 chassisShow 125 chippropshow 128 chipregshow 130 cmemRetentionTest 132 cmiTest 135 configDefault 139 configDownload 141 configShow 144 configUpload 147 configure 150 crossPortTest 163 dataTypeShow 172 date 174 d...

Page 5: ...y 199 diagsetburnin 201 diagsetcycle 203 diagshow 205 diagshowtime 208 diagsilkworm 210 diagskiptests 212 diagstopburnin 214 dlsReset 216 dlsSet 218 dlsShow 220 dnsconfig 221 errClear 223 errDump 225 errNvLogSizeSet 227 errNvLogSizeShow 229 errSaveLvlSet 230 errSaveLvlShow 232 errShow 233 exit 239 fabportshow 240 fabretryshow 243 fabricprincipal 245 fabricShow 247 fabstateclear 249 fabstateshow 25...

Page 6: ...how 280 fcprlsshow 282 fdmicacheshow 284 fdmishow 286 filterTest 288 firmwareCommit 291 firmwareDownload 293 firmwaredownloadstatus 298 firmwarerestore 300 firmwareshow 302 fporttest 304 fspfShow 308 fwAlarmsFilterSet 311 fwAlarmsFilterShow 313 fwClassInit 314 fwConfigReload 316 fwConfigure 318 fwFruCfg 323 fwHelp 325 fwMailCfg 327 fwsamshow 330 fwSetToCustom 332 fwSetToDefault 333 fwShow 334 gbic...

Page 7: ... 359 i 361 ifModeSet 364 ifModeShow 367 ifShow 369 interfaceShow 371 iodReset 376 iodSet 378 iodShow 380 ipAddrSet 381 ipAddrShow 385 islshow 388 itemlist 389 killtelnet 392 ledtest 395 licenseAdd 396 licenseHelp 398 licenseIdShow 400 licenseRemove 402 licenseShow 404 linkCost 406 login 409 logout 410 loopPortTest 412 LSDbShow 418 mcastShow 422 memshow 424 mscapabilityshow 426 msConfigure 429 ...

Page 8: ...scamshow 458 nsShow 460 nsstatshow 463 nszonemember 465 parityCheck 467 passwd 469 pdshow 473 perfAddEEMonitor 475 perfAddIPMonitor 478 perfAddReadMonitor 480 perfAddRWMonitor 482 perfAddSCSIMonitor 484 perfAddUserMonitor 486 perfAddWriteMonitor 490 perfCfgClear 492 perfCfgRestore 494 perfCfgSave 496 perfcleareemonitor 498 perfclearfiltermonitor 500 perfClrAlpaCrc 502 perfDelEEMonitor 504 perfDelF...

Page 9: ...ance 541 portCfgLport 547 portcfgpersistentdisable 549 portcfgpersistentenable 551 portCfgShow 553 portCfgSpeed 556 portCfgTrunkport 558 portdebug 560 portDisable 561 portEnable 563 portErrShow 565 portflagsshow 567 portLEDTest 569 portLogClear 571 portLogDump 573 portLogDumpPort 576 portloginshow 579 portlogpdisc 581 portLogShow 582 portlogshowport 585 portLoopbackTest 587 portname 592 portPerfSh...

Page 10: ...631 ptdatashow 633 ptphantomshow 635 ptpropshow 637 ptregshow 639 ptrouteshow 641 ptstatsshow 643 qlDisable 645 qlEnable 647 qloopAdd 649 qloopCreate 651 qloopDelete 653 qloopRemove 655 qloopShow 657 qlPartner 659 qlPortDisable 661 qlPortEnable 663 qlPortShowAll 665 qlShow 667 qlStatsShow 670 quietMode 672 ramTest 674 reboot 677 routeHelp 679 savecore 681 secfabricshow 683 secfcsfailover 685 seche...

Page 11: ...719 secpolicyremove 721 secpolicysave 725 secpolicyshow 727 secstatsreset 731 secstatsshow 734 sectemppasswdreset 737 sectemppasswdset 739 sectransabort 741 secversionreset 743 sensorShow 745 setdbg 747 setesdmode 748 setgbicmode 750 setsfpmode 752 setSplbMode 754 setverbose 756 sfpShow 757 slotOff 760 slotOn 761 slotpoweroff 762 slotpoweron 763 slotShow 764 snmpMibCapSet 766 spinFab 768 spinSilk ...

Page 12: ...6 switchShow 818 switchShutdown 824 switchStart 826 switchStatusPolicySet 828 switchStatusPolicyShow 831 switchStatusShow 833 switchuptime 835 syslogdIpAdd 836 syslogdIpRemove 838 syslogdIpShow 840 systemtest 841 systemverification 843 tempShow 846 timeout 848 topologyShow 850 trackChangesHelp 853 trackChangesSet 854 trackChangesShow 856 trunkDebug 857 trunkShow 859 tsclockserver 861 tshelp 863 ts...

Page 13: ...Watch Commands 904 Trunking Commands 905 Advanced Performance Monitoring Commands 906 Secure Fabric OS Commands 908 3 Fabric OS Version Comparison 911 Command Differences Between Versions 912 4 Fabric and Switch Management 927 Overview 928 User Access Level 929 Fabric OS Command Line Interface 930 Web Tools 931 Fabric Manager 932 Fabric Watch 934 Fabric OS Access Layer API 935 Management Server 93...

Page 14: ...igure Fabric Watch Classes and Areas 318 11 Command Field Description 361 12 Object Descriptions 391 13 LSDbShow Display Fields 418 14 Group Fields 423 15 PortShow Display Fields 603 16 Contributor Value and Status 828 17 Contributor Value and Status 831 18 Zoning Commands 900 19 QuickLoop Fabric Assist Mode Commands 902 20 Extended Fabric Command 903 21 Fabric Watch Commands 904 22 Trunking Comma...

Page 15: ...ide About this Guide This reference guide provides information to help you Understand and use Fabric OS commands Manage a switch or fabric Contact technical support for additional assistance About this Guide topics include Overview page 16 Conventions page 17 Getting Help page 19 ...

Page 16: ...ches Fabric Operating System V3 1 x or later Related Documentation For a list of related documents included with this product see the Related Documents section of the Release Notes that came with your switch For the latest information documentation and firmware releases please visit the following StorageWorks website http www hp com country us eng prodserv storage html For information about Fibre ...

Page 17: ...uld result in bodily harm or death Caution Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in damage to equipment or data Table 1 Document Conventions Element Convention Cross reference links Blue text Figure 1 Key and field names menu items buttons and dialog box titles Bold File names application names and text emphasis Italics User input command and director...

Page 18: ...About this Guide 18 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Note Text set off in this manner presents commentary sidelights or interesting points of information ...

Page 19: ...Be sure to have the following information available before calling Firmware version running on the switch A printed output of the switchshow command from the problem switch A configuration diagram showing hardware interconnections Technical support registration number if applicable Product serial numbers Product model names and numbers Applicable error messages Operating system type and revision l...

Page 20: ... 1 x Reference Guide HP Authorized Reseller For the name of your nearest HP authorized reseller In the United States call 1 800 345 1518 In Canada call 1 800 263 5868 Elsewhere see the HP website for locations and telephone numbers http www hp com ...

Page 21: ...21 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide 1 Fabric OS Commands This chapter lists the Fabric OS commands It also shows their syntax and operands and provides examples of their usage ...

Page 22: ... agent to default values Note In the StorageWorks Core switch there is one SNMP agent per logical switch This command is specific to the logical switch you are logged into The following values are reset to default agtcfgDefault sysDescr The system description The default value is Fibre Channel Switch sysLocation The location of the system The default value is End User Premise sysContact The contac...

Page 23: ...nd to the IP address of the Management Station In addition for V4 1 x the trap recipient must be able to pass the Access Control List ACL check swEventTrapLevel The event trap level in conjunction with the event s severity level When an event occurs and if its severity level is at or below the set value the SNMP trap swEventTrap is sent to configured trap recipients By default this value is set at...

Page 24: ...to the access An ACL check is turned off when all six entries contain 0 0 0 0 Note When secure mode is enabled the Access Control List feature is incorporated into the WSNMP WinSNMP and Reliable SNMP RSNMP security policies Community strings can be changed on the primary FCS switch only and will propagate changes across the fabric See Security Commands on page 941 Operands None Example To set the ...

Page 25: ...No access host configured yet Entry 3 No access host configured yet Entry 4 No access host configured yet Entry 5 No access host configured yet SNMPv1 community and trap recipient configuration Community 1 Secret Code rw No trap recipient configured yet Community 2 OrigEquipMfr rw No trap recipient configured yet Community 3 private rw No trap recipient configured yet Community 4 public ro No trap...

Page 26: ...in the switch Note In the StorageWorks Core switch there is one SNMP agent per logical switch This command is specific to the logical switch you are logged into Set the values for the following items agtcfgSet sysDescr The system description The default value is Fibre Channel Switch sysLocation The location of the system The default value is End User Premise sysContact The contact information for ...

Page 27: ...ACLs to restrict SNMP get set operations to hosts under a host subnet area Host subnet area is defined by comparing non zero IP octets For example an ACL of 192 168 64 x enables access for any hosts that start with the specified octets The connecting host is enabled as 192 168 64 xx All swEventTrapLevel The event trap level in conjunction with the event s severity level When an event occurs and if...

Page 28: ...ut of six entries is given to the access An ACL check is turned off when all six entries contain 0 0 0 0 Note When secure mode is enabled the Access Control List feature is incorporated into the WSNMP and RSNMP security policies Community strings can be changed on the primary FCS switch only and will propagate changes across the fabric See Security Commands on page 941 Operands None ...

Page 29: ...w OrigEquipMfr Trap Recipient s IP address in dot notation 192 168 1 26 Community rw private Trap Recipient s IP address in dot notation 0 0 0 0 192 168 64 88 Community ro public Trap Recipient s IP address in dot notation 0 0 0 0 Community ro common Trap Recipient s IP address in dot notation 0 0 0 0 Community ro FibreChannel Trap Recipient s IP address in dot notation 0 0 0 0 SNMP access list co...

Page 30: ...n dot notation 192 168 1 26 Community rw private Trap Recipient s IP address in dot notation 0 0 0 0 192 168 64 88 Community ro public Trap Recipient s IP address in dot notation 0 0 0 0 Community ro common Trap Recipient s IP address in dot notation 0 0 0 0 Community ro FibreChannel Trap Recipient s IP address in dot notation 0 0 0 0 SNMP access list configuration Access host subnet area in dot n...

Page 31: ... recipient configured yet Community 4 public ro No trap recipient configured yet Community 5 common ro No trap recipient configured yet Community 6 FibreChannel ro No trap recipient configured yet SNMP access list configuration Entry 0 Access host subnet area 192 168 64 0 rw Entry 1 No access host configured yet Entry 2 No access host configured yet Entry 3 No access host configured yet Entry 4 No...

Page 32: ...nt in the switch Note In the StorageWorks Core switch there is one SNMP agent per logical switch This command is specific to the logical switch you are logged into The following information is displayed agtcfgShow sysDescr The system description The default value is Fibre Channel Switch sysLocation The location of the system The default value is End User Premise sysContact The contact information ...

Page 33: ...e IP address of the Management Station In addition for V4 1 x the trap recipient must be able to pass the Access Control List ACL check swEventTrapLevel The event trap level in conjunction with the event s severity level When an event occurs and if its severity level is at or below the set value the SNMP trap swEventTrap is sent to configured trap recipients By default this value is set at 0 imply...

Page 34: ...led as 192 168 64 xx where xx is any number from 0 to 99 All ACL entries also have a flag to set each host subnet area to be read write or read only The highest privilege matched out of six entries is given to the access An ACL check is turned off when all six entries contain 0 0 0 0 Note When secure mode is enabled the Access Control List feature is incorporated into the WSNMP and RSNMP security ...

Page 35: ...mmunity 1 Secret C0de rw Trap recipient 192 168 1 51 Community 2 OrigEquipMfr rw Trap recipient 192 168 1 26 Community 3 private rw No trap recipient configured yet Community 4 public ro No trap recipient configured yet Community 5 common ro No trap recipient configured yet Community 6 FibreChannel ro No trap recipient configured yet SNMP access list configuration Entry 0 Access host subnet area 1...

Page 36: ...groups A group is automatically deleted if it becomes empty after deleting the local port Use the aliasShow command to show the existing groups with their corresponding N_Ports Operands This command has the following operand Example To delete a port from an existing group aliasDelete portID Specify the port ID in hexadecimal to be deleted from an alias group This operand is required switch admin a...

Page 37: ...iasDelete 37 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Exit Status See Also aliasJoin aliasShow fabricShow switchShow 0 Indicates successful operation Non Zero Indicates that the operation has failed ...

Page 38: ... N_Port defined in the fabric can be part of a group An N_Port can be added from any switch that is part of the fabric This command is interactive and prompts you to enter data to create or add to the alias group To get a list of online ports currently defined in the fabric use the nsAllShow command If the user wants to add only local ports associated with the local switch then use the nsShow comm...

Page 39: ... password Setting the authorization control Add control 0 by any 1 only itself 2 by creator 0 2 0 Del control 0 by any 1 only itself 2 by creator 0 2 0 Lsn control 0 by any 1 by none 0 1 1 Add control 0 Del control 0 Lsn control 1 Setting the Routing Bit 0x0 0xc 0x0 using FC 4 Device Data Setting FC 4 Type 0x0 0x5d 0x5 using 0x05 To set the alias qualifier in WWN format yes y no n yes Qualifier in...

Page 40: ...lias group The alias group must be identified by its hexadecimal value Operands This command has the following operand Example To remove an alias group Exit Status aliasPurge groupID Specify in hexadecimal the alias group to be removed This operand is required switch admin aliasPurge 0xfffb00 aliasPurge succeeded 0 Indicates successful operation Non Zero Indicates that the operation has failed ...

Page 41: ...aliasPurge 41 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also aliasJoin aliasShow fabricShow switchShow ...

Page 42: ...splayed The following fields are displayed aliasShow Alias ID V3 1 xonly Multicast address presented in format FFFBxx where xx is the name of the multicast group Alias ID Creator Token V4 1 xonly Multicast address presented in format FFFBxx where xx is the name of the multicast group Creator Fibre Channel address ID of Nx_Port that created alias group Creator token Alias token provided to map to t...

Page 43: ...dmin aliasShow The Local Alias Server has 1 entry Alias ID Creator Token rb type grptype qlfr Member List fffb01 fffffd 40 05 10 60000010 12000069 021200 020800 switch admin aliasShow AliasID Creator Token rb type grptype qlfr Member List fffb00 fffffd 00 05 10 10000060 69800228 019c00 The Local Alias Server has 1 entry switch admin 0 Successful operation Non Zero Indicates that the operation has ...

Page 44: ...not contain another zone alias This command changes the Defined Configuration For the change to be preserved across switch reboots it must be saved to non volatile memory using the cfgSave command For the change to become effective an appropriate zone configuration must be enabled using the cfgEnable command Note This command requires an Advanced Zoning License When security is enabled this comman...

Page 45: ... member or list of members to be added to the alias in quotation marks separated by semicolons An alias member can be specified by one or more of the following methods For V3 1 x a switch domain and physical port number pair For V4 1 x a switch domain and port area number pair View the area numbers for ports using the switchShow command WWN QuickLoop AL_PAs This operand is required switch admin al...

Page 46: ...be specified using the area number to represent a specific port and slot combination Area numbers are automatically assigned to a port by the Fabric OS You can view the area numbers using the switchShow command For V4 1 x this command changes the Defined Configuration For the change to be preserved across switch reboots it must be saved to non volatile memory using the cfgsave command For the chan...

Page 47: ... are different zone aliases Blank spaces are ignored This operand is required member Specify a member or list of members to be added to the alias in quotation marks separated by semicolons An alias member can be specified by one or more of the following methods For V3 1 x a switch domain and physical port number pair For V4 1 x a switch domain and port area number pair View the area numbers for po...

Page 48: ...Fabric OS Commands 48 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also aliAdd aliDelete aliRemove aliShow ...

Page 49: ... to non volatile memory using the cfgSave command For the change to become effective an appropriate zone configuration must be enabled using the cfgEnable command Note This command requires an Advanced Zoning License When security is enabled this command can only be issued from the Primary FCS switch See Security Commands on page 941 Operands This command has the following operand aliDelete aliNam...

Page 50: ...Fabric OS Commands 50 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Example To delete the zone alias array2 See Also aliAdd aliCreate aliRemove aliShow switch admin aliDelete array2 ...

Page 51: ...ved the zone alias is deleted This command changes the Defined Configuration For the change to be preserved across switch reboots it must be saved to non volatile memory using the cfgSave command For the change to become effective an appropriate zone configuration must be enabled using the cfgEnable command Note This command requires an Advanced Zoning License When security is enabled this command...

Page 52: ...s member can be specified by one or more of the following methods For V3 1 x a switch domain and physical port number pair For V4 1 x a switch domain and port area number pair View the area numbers for ports using the switchShow command WWN QuickLoop AL_PAs This operand is required The member list is located by an exact string match therefore it is important to maintain the order when removing mul...

Page 53: ...Use this command to display zone configuration information If a parameter is specified it is used as a pattern to match zone alias names those that match in the defined configuration are displayed Note This command requires an Advanced Zoning License When security is enabled this command can only be issued from the Primary FCS switch See Security Commands on page 941 aliShow ...

Page 54: ...s names This operand must be enclosed in quotation marks Patterns may contain Question mark that matches any single character Asterisk that matches any string of characters Ranges that match any character within the range Ranges must be enclosed in brackets for example 0 9 or a f This operand is optional mode V4 1 x only Specify 0 to display the contents of the transaction buffer the contents of t...

Page 55: ...tures When this test is run no other diagnostic can be executed until this test completes Options This command has the following operands backplanetest slot number Specify the slot number for a StorageWorks Core switch For all other switches this operand is not required The slot number must be followed by a slash and the port number so that each port is represented by both slot number 1 through 4 ...

Page 56: ...ng test patterns can be specified 1 byte fill 2 word fill 3 quad fill 4 byte not 5 word not 6 quad not 7 byte ramp 8 word ramp 9 quad ramp 10 byte lfsr 11 random 12 crpat 13 cspat 14 chalf sq 15 cqtr sq 16 rdram pat 17 jCRPAT default 18 jCJTPAT 19 jCSPAT ports list Specify a list of blade ports to test By default all the blade ports in the specified slot are used See the itemlist help pages for fu...

Page 57: ... payload size 2048 bytes using jCRPAT data seed 0xa363c42b BPC_TX 1 P B Sl3 Ch2 cPt0 bPt16 Sl1 Ch2 BPC_RX 1 P B Sl3 Ch2 cPt0 bPt16 Sl1 Ch2 BPC_TX 1 B P Sl1 Ch2 cPt0 bPt16 Sl3 Ch2 BPC_RX 1 B P Sl1 Ch2 cPt0 bPt16 Sl3 Ch2 Checking for ports segmented BPC_TX 1 P B Sl4 Ch2 cPt2 bPt18 Sl1 Ch2 BPC_RX 1 P B Sl4 Ch2 cPt2 bPt18 Sl1 Ch2 BPC_TX 1 B P Sl1 Ch2 cPt2 bPt18 Sl4 Ch2 BPC_RX 1 B P Sl1 Ch2 cPt2 bPt18 ...

Page 58: ...er user port If a valid path does not exist between any two user ports then that path will fail to transmit the first frame between the two ports Proper VC mapping such that an arbitrarily large number of frames may be transmitted without running out of credit If the VC credit mapping is not correct then the test will fail after enough frames have been sent to exhaust the initial credit VC mapping...

Page 59: ...not tested Operands This command has the following operands nframes num Specify the number of frame sequences to send The default value is 100 ports list Specify a list of user ports The default value is all user ports lb_mode mode Specify the loopback mode for source and destination standard meanings The default mode is 5 The valid modes are 0 cable loopback 1 plug loopback 2 external loopback SE...

Page 60: ...de backPort will send only one burst of frames to each port from each miniswitch to miniswitch link This tests all of the external connections with only K N frames instead of the N2 frames required in the all to all mode This mode is intended to be used in ESS burn in testing to optimize test time This command tests only the external connections between each miniswitch and txdpath is used to test ...

Page 61: ...backPort 61 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also crossporttest portloopbacktest spinsilk spinfab ...

Page 62: ...ernate value of DEL hex 7F Operands This command has the following operand Specify the command with no operand to display the current setting Example To display the current backspace character and change it to DEL backSpace mode Specify 0 to use the standard backspace character BACKSPACE Specify 1 to use the alternate backspace character DEL This operand is optional switch admin backSpace BackSpac...

Page 63: ... or by entering the bannerset command without an operand making the session interactive If you enter the banner text using the interactive method the maximum length is 1022 characters If the banner text length exceeds the maximum allowed the software truncates the input To close the banner text string enter a period at the beginning of a new line Operands This command has the following operand ban...

Page 64: ...ples To set a new banner for a switch See Also bannershow switch admin bannerset my banner Please input context of security banner press RETURN at the beginning of a newline to finish input Do not log into this switch if you are not an authorized administrator switch admin ...

Page 65: ...lability Admin Release V3 1 x and V4 1 x Description Use this command to display the contents of the banner Operands None Examples To display the banner for a switch See Also bannerset bannershow switch admin bannershow Banner Do not log into this switch if you are not an authorized administrator switch admin ...

Page 66: ...mbers of the broadcast distribution tree The broadcast path selection protocol selects the E_Ports that are part of the broadcast distribution tree The E_Ports are chosen in such a way to prevent broadcast routing loops The following fields are displayed The broadcast routing information for the ports is displayed as a set of hexadecimal bit maps For more information on reading hexadecimal bit map...

Page 67: ...pe Operands None Examples To display the broadcast routing information for all ports in the switch See Also mcastShow portRouteShow switch admin bcastShow Group Member Ports Member ISL Ports Static ISL Ports 256 0x00012083 0x00002080 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 switch admin ...

Page 68: ...h port 15 and back again The pattern continues until the user turns it off This can be used to locate a physical unit Beaconing mode only takes over the port LEDs it does not change the switch s functional behavior The normal flashing LED pattern associated with an active faulty or disabled port for example is suppressed and only the beaconing pattern is displayed If a diagnostic frame based test ...

Page 69: ...turn the blade in slot 2 beaconing mode ON and then OFF See Also switchShow slotnumber Specify the slot number on which to enable bladeBeacon mode Specify a value of 1 to set beaconing mode ON Specify a value of 0 to set beaconing mode OFF This operand is required switch admin bladeBeacon 2 1 switch admin bladeBeacon 2 1 ...

Page 70: ...Admin Release V4 1 x Description Use this command to run a suite of diagnostics tests on the specified switch blade To run this command you must install loopback plugs on every port The tests executed are portregtest centralmemorytest cmitest camtest filtertest statstest portloopbacktest txdpath crossporttest turboramtest spinsilk backport diagshow bladeDiag ...

Page 71: ...ile Specify that the output of the command will be placed in a file named by the logfile argument The log file will contain all activity that occurred during the execution of the command All error messages are also saved in the logfile If this option is not specified no log file is created switch admin bladediag slot 1 Testing slot 1 user ports 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 PortRegTest Running Port Regis...

Page 72: ...insilk statstest txdpath switch admin bladediag slot 1 Testing slot 1 user ports 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 PortRegTest Running Port Register Test passed Test Complete portregtest Pass 1 of 1 Duration 0 hr 2 min 14 sec 0 2 14 655 passed Test return status 0 CentralMemoryTest Running centralmemorytest passed Test Complete centralmemorytest Pass 1 of 1 Duration 0 hr 0 min 18 sec 0 0 18 415 passed Test r...

Page 73: ...ity Admin Release V4 1 x Description Use this command to run a suite of diagnostics tests on the specified switch blade To run this command you must install loopback plugs on every port The tests executed are portregtest centralmemorytest cmitest camtest filtertest statstest portloopbacktest txdpath crossporttest spinsilk backport diagshow bladeDiagShort ...

Page 74: ...followed by a slash and the port number so that each port is represented by both slot number 1 through 4 or 7 through 10 and port number 0 through 15 The StorageWorks Core switch has a total of 10 slots Slots number 5 and 6 are control processor cards and slots 1 through 4 and 7 through 10 are port cards On each port card there are 16 ports counted from the bottom 0 to 15 log logfile Specify that ...

Page 75: ...atus 0 CentralMemoryTest Running centralmemorytest passed Test Complete centralmemorytest Pass 1 of 1 Duration 0 hr 0 min 18 sec 0 0 18 415 passed Test return status 0 output truncated switch admin switchdiagshort Testing user ports 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 PortRegTest Running Port Register Test passed Test Complete portregtest Pass 1 of 1 Duration 0 hr 2 min 14 sec 0 2 14 655 passed Test return sta...

Page 76: ... Commands 76 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also backport bladediag camtest centralmemorytest cmitest crossporttest diagshow filtertest portloopbacktest portregtest spinsilk statstest txdpath ...

Page 77: ...h will configure based on the other blade ports A blade must be disabled before making configuration changes or before running many of the diagnostic tests A blade does not need to be disabled before rebooting or powering off To observe and verify the disable process watch the front panel LEDs change to slow flashing yellow as each port of the blade is disabled Note A blade cannot be disabled or e...

Page 78: ...Fabric OS Commands 78 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Example Disable a blade in slot 2 See Also switchshow bladeenable portdisable protenable switch admin bladedisable 2 ...

Page 79: ...nd is issued the 10 second Fabric stability countdown is displayed If this switch remains the Principal switch at the end of the countdown then it assigns itself a Domain Id If another switch assumes the Principal role then this switch becomes a Subordinate switch and accepts a Domain Id from the Principal To observe and verify the enable process watch the front panel LEDs change from slow flashin...

Page 80: ...mands 80 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Example Enable a blade in slot 2 See Also switchshow bladedisable portdisable portenable switch admin bladeenable 2 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 fabric Principal switch ...

Page 81: ... This command has the following operand Example To display the blade properties for blade 7 bladePropShow slot slot Specify the slot number of the blade you want to run diagnostics on switch admin bladepropshow slot 7 Slot 7 2 4 8 64 0 1657 0001 1 1657 0001 2 1657 0001 3 1657 0001 4 1657 0001 5 1657 0001 6 1657 0001 7 1657 0001 0 8 1 9 0 10 2 9 0 6 3 7 1 9 0 8 1 6 2 7 1 10 3 9 2 9 0 10 2 7 1 6 2 1...

Page 82: ...Fabric OS Commands 82 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also chippropshow ptpropshow ...

Page 83: ...psis bsn Availability Admin Release V3 1 x Description Use this command to display the serial number Note To display the serial number for a component in V4 1 x use the chassisshow command Operands None Examples To display the serial number See Also ssn bsn switch admin bsn FT00X800506 ...

Page 84: ...hit and miss tests The CAM is used by QuickLoop to translate the SID When a CAM is presented with data it checks if the data is present in its memory A hit means the data is found in the CAM A miss means the data is not found In this test the CAM is filled with 4 kinds of data patterns 1 A walking 1 2 A walking 0 3 A random pattern 4 An inverted version of the random pattern above Once filled with...

Page 85: ...V3 1 x only Specify the number of times to perform this test The default value is 1 slot number V4 1 x only Specify the slot number that the diagnostic will operate on The ports specified will be relative to this slot number The default is set to 0 and is designed to operate on fixed port count products passcnt count V4 1 x only Specify the number of times to perform this test The default value is...

Page 86: ...may report one or more of the following error messages For V3 1 x DIAG CAMINIT DIAG XMIT DIAG CAMSID For V4 1 x DIAG CAMFLTR DIAG CAMINIT DIAG CAMSID DIAG CAMSTAT DIAG CAMXMIT See Also centralmemorytest cmemretentiontest cmitest crossporttest itemlist portloopbacktest portregtest ramtest spinsilk sramretentiontest ...

Page 87: ...count datatype type ports itemlist seed value Availability Admin Release V3 1 x and V4 1 x Description Use this command to execute an address and data bus verification of the ASIC SRAMs which serve as the Central Memory Note This command cannot be executed on an enabled switch You must first disable the switch using the switchDisable command Note Subtest 3 is not available on 2 Gbps capable produc...

Page 88: ...eports the DIAG CMBISRTO If any of the SRAMs within the ASIC fails to map out the bad rows its fail bit is set and the DIAG CMBISRF error is generated Subtest 2 The data write read subtest executes the address and data bus verifications by running a specified unique ramp pattern D to all SRAMs in all ASICs in the switch When all SRAMs are written with pattern D the SRAMs are read and compared agai...

Page 89: ...f all ASICs with unique frames 2 Set up the hardware such that each ASIC is read by all of the MAX number of ports in the switch Data received is compared against the frame written into the ASIC Port 0 reads the Central Memory in ASIC 0 Port 1 reads the Central Memory in ASIC 0 Port 14 reads the Central Memory in ASIC 0 Port 15 reads the Central Memory in ASIC 0 Port 0 reads the Central Memory in ...

Page 90: ...e bad buffer number in the data packet can be detected its error flag and interrupt bits are set The test method is as follows 1 Clear the error and interrupt bits of all ASICs 2 Set up the hardware so that transmission of data includes a bad buffer number 3 For each ASIC X in the switch do For each of the 11 possible offsets do a Write a 64 byte pattern in the Central Memory b Read X from all ASI...

Page 91: ...Y has its Its interrupt status are set An error type of chip number error The port number in error is the receiver port which is the base port of asic Y d Reading the error register clears the CMEM interrupt bit ready for the next offset to test Operands This command has the following operands passcount V3 1 x only Specify the number of test passes to run By default the test will be run one time T...

Page 92: ...s to run By default the test will be run one time datatype type V4 1 x only Specify the type of data pattern to use By default type 9 QUAD_RAMP is used For a complete list of supported data patterns run the datatypeshow command Some common settings are 1 BYTE_FILL pattern 2 WORD_FILL pattern 3 QUAD_FILL pattern 9 QUAD_RAMP Addr Data pattern 11 RANDOM pattern ports itemlist V4 1 x only Specify a se...

Page 93: ...TO 2 DIAG LCMRS 3 DIAG LCMEM Subtest 3 1 DIAG CMNOBUF 2 DIAG LCMTO 3 DIAG LCMRS 4 DIAG LCMEMTX Subtest 4 1 DIAG TIMEOUT 2 DIAG BADINT 3 DIAG CMERRTYPE 4 DIAG CMERRPTN Subtest 5 1 DIAG TIMEOUT 2 DIAG BADINT 3 DIAG CMERRTYPE 4 DIAG CMERRPTN Subtest 6 1 DIAG TIMEOUT 2 DIAG BADINT 3 DIAG CMERRTYPE 4 DIAG CMERRPTN switch admin centralmemorytest ports 1 0 1 15 Running centralmemorytest passed Test Compl...

Page 94: ...st 3 CM_NO_BUF LCMEMTX_ERR LCMRS_ERR LCMTO_ERR Subtest 4 BAD_INT CM_ERR_PTN CM_ERR_TYPE TIMEOUT Subtest 5 BAD_INT CM_ERR_PTN CM_ERR_TYPE TIMEOUT Subtest 6 BAD_INT CM_ERR_PTN CM_ERR_TYPE TIMEOUT See Also camtest cmemretentiontest cmitest crossporttest filtertest portloopbacktest portregtest ramtest spinsilk sramretentiontest ...

Page 95: ...ion information The Effective configuration is a single zone configuration that is currently in effect The devices that an initiator sees are based on this configuration The Effective configuration is built when a specified zone configuration is enabled Note This command requires an Advanced Zoning license When security is enabled this command can only be issued from the Primary FCS switch See Sec...

Page 96: ...Guide Example To show the Effective zone configuration information See Also cfgclear cfgcreate cfgdelete cfgremove cfgsave cfgshow switch admin cfgactvshow Effective configuration cfg c4 zone z3 33 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 zone z4 44 01 23 45 67 89 a0 bc switch admin ...

Page 97: ...is command changes the Defined Configuration For the change to be preserved across switch reboots it must be saved to non volatile memory using the cfgSave command For the change to become effective an appropriate zone configuration must be enabled using the cfgEnable command Note This command requires an Advanced Zoning license When security is enabled this command can only be issued from the Pri...

Page 98: ...ave cfgShow cfgTransAbort cfgtransshow cfgName Specify a name for the zone configuration in quotation marks This operand is required member Specify a zone member or a list of zone members to be added to the configuration in quotation marks separated by semicolons Members can be specified in one or more of the following ways Zone names QuickLoop names FA Fabric Assist zone names This operand is req...

Page 99: ...iguration is enabled a warning is displayed to first disable the enabled zone configuration or to provide a valid configuration with the same name After clearing the transaction buffer using the cfgClear command use the cfgDisable command to commit the transaction and disable and clear the zone configuration in non volatile memory for all the switches in the fabric across reboots Note This command...

Page 100: ...e To clear all zones and then clear non volatile memory See Also cfgAdd cfgCreate cfgDelete cfgDisable cfgEnable cfgRemove cfgSave cfgShow cfgTransAbort cfgtransshow switch admin cfgClear Do you really want to clear all configurations Yes y no n no yes switch admin cfgdisable ...

Page 101: ...paces are ignored The zone configuration member list must have at least one member Empty member lists are not allowed This command changes the Defined Configuration For the change to be preserved across switch reboots it must be saved to non volatile memory using the cfgSave command For the change to become effective an appropriate zone configuration must be enabled using the cfgEnable command Ref...

Page 102: ...fgShow cfgTransAbort cfgtransshow cfgName Specify a name for the zone configuration in quotation marks This operand is required member Specify a member or list of members to be added to zone configuration in quotation marks separated by semicolons Members can be specified in one or more of the following methods Zone names QuickLoop names FA Fabric Assist zone names This operand is required switch ...

Page 103: ...nges the Defined Configuration For the change to be preserved across switch reboots it must be saved to non volatile memory using the cfgSave command For the change to become effective an appropriate zone configuration must be enabled using the cfgEnable command Note This command requires an Advanced Zoning license When security is enabled this command can only be issued from the Primary FCS switc...

Page 104: ...Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Example To delete a zone configuration See Also cfgAdd cfgClear cfgCreate cfgDisable cfgEnable cfgRemove cfgSave cfgShow cfgTransAbort cfgtransshow switch admin cfgDelete Test_cfg ...

Page 105: ... the transaction buffer to volatile and non volatile memory This command ends and commits the current zoning transaction If a transaction is open on a different switch in the fabric when this command is run the transaction on the other switch is automatically aborted A message is displayed on the other switch notifying the transation abort Note This command requires an Advanced Zoning license When...

Page 106: ...on 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Example To disable the current zone configuration See Also cfgAdd cfgClear cfgCreate cfgDelete cfgEnable cfgRemove cfgSave cfgShow cfgTransAbort cfgtransshow switch admin cfgDisable Updating flash switch admin ...

Page 107: ...ffective configuration If the build fails the previous state is preserved zoning remains disabled or the previous Effective configuration remains in effect If the build succeeds the new configuration replaces the previous configuration See the cfgShow command for a description of defined and effective configurations This command ends and commits the current transaction If a transaction is open on ...

Page 108: ...See Security Commands on page 941 Operands This command has the following operand Example To enable the zone configuration Test_cfg See Also cfgAdd cfgClear cfgCreate cfgDelete cfgDisable cfgRemove cfgSave cfgShow cfgTransAbort cfgtransshow cfgName Specify the name of a zone configuration to enable in quotation marks This operand is required switch admin cfgEnable Test_cfg zone config Test_cfg is ...

Page 109: ...onfiguration contains zone2 zone3 zone4 then removing zone3 zone4 succeeds but removing zone4 zone3 fails If all members are removed the zone configuration is deleted For V4 1 x this command changes the Defined Configuration For the change to be preserved across switch reboots it must be saved to non volatile memory using the cfgsave command For the change to become effective an appropriate zone c...

Page 110: ...Enable cfgSave cfgShow cfgTransAbort cfgtransshow cfgName Specify a name of a zone configuration in quotation marks member Specify one or more members to be deleted from the zone configuration in quotation marks separated by semicolons Members can be specified in one or more of the following methods Zone names QuickLoop names FA Fabric Assist zone names This operand is required switch admin cfgRem...

Page 111: ...ed configuration is reloaded at power on only valid configurations are saved The cfgSave command verifies that the enabled configuration is valid by performing the same tests as cfgEnable If the tests fail an error is displayed and the configuration is not saved Tests may fail if a configuration has been modified since the last cfgEnable This command ends and commits the current transaction If a t...

Page 112: ...ands None Example To enable a zone configuration then save it See Also cfgAdd cfgClear cfgCreate cfgDelete cfgDisable cfgEnable cfgRemove cfgShow cfgTransAbort cfgtransshow switch admin cfgEnable Test_cfg zone config Test_cfg is in effect switch admin cfgSave Updating flash ...

Page 113: ...rn are displayed The Defined configuration is the complete set of all zone objects that have been defined in the fabric There can be multiple zone configurations defined but only one can be enabled at a time There may be inconsistencies in the definitions zones or aliases that are referenced but not defined or there may be duplicate members The Defined configuration is the current state of the adm...

Page 114: ...sk that matches any string of characters Ranges which match any character within the range For example 0 9 or a f This operand is optional pattern V4 1 x only A POSIX style regular expression used to match zone configuration names The pattern must be enclosed in quotation marks Patterns may contain Question mark that matches any single character Asterisk that matches any string of characters Range...

Page 115: ... alias array1 21 00 00 20 37 0c 76 8c 21 00 00 20 37 0c 71 02 alias array2 21 00 00 20 37 0c 76 22 21 00 00 20 37 0c 76 28 alias loop1 21 00 00 20 37 0c 76 85 21 00 00 20 37 0c 71 df Effective configuration cfg USA_cfg zone Blue_zone 1 1 21 00 00 20 37 0c 76 8c 21 00 00 20 37 0c 71 02 1 2 21 00 00 20 37 0c 76 22 21 00 00 20 37 0c 76 28 zone Red_zone 1 0 21 00 00 20 37 0c 76 85 21 00 00 20 37 0c 71...

Page 116: ...Fabric OS Commands 116 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also cfgAdd cfgClear cfgCreate cfgDelete cfgDisable cfgEnable cfgRemove cfgSave cfgTransAbort cfgtransshow ...

Page 117: ...ation determined by the amount of flash memory available for storing the Defined configuration The committed size is the size of the Defined configuration currently stored in flash The transaction size is the size of the uncommitted Defined configuration This value will be non zero if the Defined configuration is being modified by programs such as telnet or API otherwise it is 0 See cfgshow for a ...

Page 118: ...integer If a non zero integer is specified as the parameter the size of the flash memory allocated for the zone database is displayed The zone database includes both the Defined and Effective configurations This size is in kilobytes This operand is optional switch admin cfgsize Zone DB max size 98232 bytes committed 8812 transaction 0 switch admin cfgsize 1 Zone DB flash size 96 KB switch admin ...

Page 119: ...the state before the transaction was started If a transaction is open on a different switch in the fabric when this command is run the transaction on the other switch remains open and unaffected Note This command requires an Advanced Zoning license When security is enabled this command can only be issued from the Primary FCS switch See Security Commands on page 941 Operands For V3 1 x none For V4 ...

Page 120: ...action See Also cfgAdd cfgClear cfgCreate cfgDelete cfgDisable cfgEnable cfgRemove cfgSave cfgShow cfgtransshow switch admin cfgtransshow Current transaction token is 271010736 It is abortable switch admin cfgtransabort Warning Current Zoning Transaction was aborted Reason code User Command switch admin ...

Page 121: ...mand to show the ID of the current zoning transaction It will also give the information about whether the transaction can be aborted or not The transaction can not be aborted if it is an internal zoning transaction Note This command requires an Advanced Zoning license When security is enabled this command can only be issued from the Primary FCS switch See Security Commands on page 941 Operands Non...

Page 122: ...Delete cfgDisable cfgEnable cfgRemove cfgSave cfgShow cfgTransAbort switch admin cfgtransshow There is no outstanding zone transactions switch admin cfgclear Do you really want to clear all configurations yes y no n no y Clearing All zoning configurations switch admin cfgtransshow Current transaction token is 271010736 It is abortable switch admin ...

Page 123: ...orks Core switch In the StorageWorks Core switch there are two logical switches associated with a single chassis Enter this command with no parameter to display the current name Enter this command with a name specified to set the chassis name to the new value Operands This command has the following operand chassisName name Specify a new name for the chassis Chassis names can be up to 16 characters...

Page 124: ...Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Example The following command changes the chassis s name to SW12K See Also switchName switch admin chassisname Silkworm12000 switch admin chassisname SW12K switch admin chassisname SW12K switch admin ...

Page 125: ... 2 3 4 5 6 8 and 10 through 13 In addition for lines 10 through 13 if there is no data set these lines will be suppressed The header data is formatted into a record consisting of up to 13 lines The lines and their meaning are described below 1 The first line of each record contains the object ID If the FRU is part of an assembly a brief description in parentheses will be displayed 2 This line disp...

Page 126: ...lays the date the FRU header was last updated Update Day dd Month mm Year yyyy 8 This line displays the cumulative time in days that the FRU has been powered on Time Alive dddd days 9 This line displays the current time in days since the FRU was last powered on Time Awake ddd days 10 This line displays the externally supplied ID up to 10 characters ID xxxxxxxxxx 11 This line displays the externall...

Page 127: ...rial Num 2734658 Revision Num A 00 CP BLADE Slot 6 Header Version 1 Power Consume Factor 40 Brocade Part Num 60 0001604 02 Brocade Serial Num FP00X600128 Manufacture Day 12 Month 6 Year 2001 Update Day 15 Month 7 Year 2001 Time Alive 61 days Time Awake 16 days ID 555 374757 Part Num 236 296 12350 Serial Num 2836542 Revision Num A 00 POWER SUPPLY Unit 2 Header Version 1 Power Consume Factor 1000 Br...

Page 128: ...hip property contents for the specified chip on the specified blade slot Operands This command has the following operands chippropshow slotnumber Specify the slot number for a StorageWorks Core switch For all other switches this operand is not required chip Specify the index of the chip within the blade to be displayed This operand is optional all Specify this operand to display the properties for...

Page 129: ...001 0104 2 8 slot 7 minis 2 chip 0 1657 0001 0104 2 8 slot 7 minis 2 chip 1 1657 0001 0104 2 8 slot 7 minis 3 chip 0 1657 0001 0104 2 8 slot 7 minis 3 chip 1 1657 0001 0104 2 8 san95 admin switch admin chippropshow 2 all Slot 2 minis 0 chip 0 1657 0001 0104 2 8 Slot 2 minis 0 chip 1 1657 0001 0104 2 8 Slot 2 minis 1 chip 0 1657 0001 0104 2 8 Slot 2 minis 1 chip 1 1657 0001 0104 2 8 Slot 2 minis 2 ...

Page 130: ...ity All users Release V4 1 x Description Use this command to display the ASIC register contents for the specified chip on the specified blade slot Operands This command has the following operands chipregshow slotnumber Specify the slot number of the chip you want to test chip Specify the index of the chip within the blade to be displayed filter Specify a filter string ...

Page 131: ... lli_def 00000000 0xca6ed030 lli_mask 30020000 0xca6ed034 prescaler0 000a 0xca6ed036 tod0 011f 0xca6ed038 toc0 0007 0xca6ed03a toc1 0000 0xca6ed03c toc_ctl 0000 0xca6ed044 putq_stat ffffffff 0xca6ed04c flist_stat 0018037e 0xca6ed054 tolist_stat ffffffff 0xca6ed05c plist_stat ffffffff 0xca6ed064 cflist_stat 000b037f 0xca6ed06c aulist_stat ffffffff 0xca6ed070 tfr_ctl 2000 0xca6ed072 tfr_status 2000 ...

Page 132: ...tral memory SRAMs in the ASIC The method used is to write a fill pattern to all SRAMs wait 10 seconds and then read all SRAMs checking that data read should match data previously written Repeat using the inverted version of the pattern The patterns used are as follows 1 0xffffffff and 0x00000000 2 0x55555555 and 0xaaaaaaaa 3 0x33333333 and 0xcccccccc 4 0x0f0f0f0f and 0xf0f0f0f0 5 QUAD_RAMP with a ...

Page 133: ...tern to use By default type 9 QUAD_RAMP is used For a complete list of supported data patterns run the datatypeshow command Some common settings are Pattern type example BYTE_FILL 1 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 WORD_FILL 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 QUAD_FILL 3 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 QUAD_RAMP 9 00000000 00000001 00000002 00000003 RANDOM 11 55 16 fc d7 ...

Page 134: ...sted below are possible error messages if failures are detected For V3 1 x DIAG LCMRS DIAG LCMTO DIAG LCMEM For V4 1 x LCMEM_ERR LCMRS_ERR LCMTO_ERR See Also camTest centralMemoryTest cmiTest crossPortTest datatypeshow itemlist portLoopbackTest ramTest spinSilk sramRetentionTest ...

Page 135: ...Cs is OK It also verifies that a message sent with a bad checksum will set the error and interrupt status bits of the destination ASIC and that a message with a good checksum will not set any error or interrupt bit in any ASIC The CMI is used to send transmission requests or completion messages between the ACIC transmitter and receiver The test method is as follows 1 For each destination ASIC X or...

Page 136: ...er to test The default is set to 0 and designed to operate on fixed port count products passcnt count V4 1 x only Specify the number of test passes to run By default the test will be run one time txports list V4 1 x only Specify a list of ports to transmit data By default all the ports in the specified slot slot number will be used See itemlist help pages for further details This operand is option...

Page 137: ... the following error messages For V3 1 x DIAG CMISA1 DIAG CMINOCAP DIAG CMICKSUM DIAG CMIINVCAP DIAG CMIDATA DIAG INTNIL DIAG BADINT For V4 1 x DIAG BADINT DIAG CMICKSUM DIAG CMIDATA DIAG CMIINVCAP DIAG CMINOCAP DIAG CMISA1 DIAG INTNIL switch admin cmiTest Running CMI Test passed switch admin cmitest txports 1 0 1 7 rxports 1 8 1 15 Running CMI Test Test Complete cmitest Pass 1 of 1 Duration 0 hr ...

Page 138: ...ric OS Commands 138 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also camtest centralmemorytest cmemretentiontest crossporttest itemlist portloopbacktest portregtest ramtest spinsilk sramretentiontest ...

Page 139: ...guration parameters with the following exceptions are reset to default values Ethernet MAC address IP address and subnetmask IP gateway address License keys OEM customization SNMP configuration System name World Wide Name Advanced Zoning configuration Note See the configure command for more information on default values for configuration parameters The configDefault command may not be executed on ...

Page 140: ...are cached by the system To avoid unexpected switch behavior reboot the system after executing this command Operands None Example To restore the system configuration to default values See Also agtcfgDefault configure switchDisable switchEnable switch admin configDefault Committing Configuration done ...

Page 141: ...RSHD does not require the passwd operand FTP always requires the passwd operand V4 1 x only supports FTP No spaces are allowed between operands To restore the configuration file from a Microsoft Windows NT system using FTP the FTP server may have to be installed from the distribution media and enabled This command can be invoked without any operands and becomes an interactive session where you are...

Page 142: ... quotation marks for example citadel or 11 22 33 44 The configuration file is downloaded from this host system This operand is optional user Specify a user name in quotation marks for example jdoe This user name is used to gain access to the host system This operand is optional file Specify a file name in quotation marks for example config txt Absolute path names may be specified using forward sla...

Page 143: ...ave permission on the host The user runs a script that prints something at login The file does not exist on the host The file is not a switch configuration file The FTP server is not running on the host The configuration data contains errors See Also configDefault configUpload configShow configure switch admin configdownload 123 123 123 123 jdoe config txt password1 Committing configuration done d...

Page 144: ... users Release V3 1 x and V4 1 x Description Use this command to view the system configuration settings set by the configure command Operands This command has the following operand configShow filter Specify a text string in quotation marks that limits the output of the command to only those entries that contain the text string This operand is optional ...

Page 145: ...ric domain 14 fabric ops BBCredit 5 fabric ops E_D_TOV 2000 fabric ops R_A_TOV 10000 fabric ops dataFieldSize 2112 fabric ops max_hops 7 fabric ops mode SeqSwitching 0 fabric ops mode fcpProbeDisable 0 fabric ops mode isolate 0 fabric ops mode longDistance 0 fabric ops mode noClassF 0 fabric ops mode pidFormat 1 fabric ops mode sync 0 fabric ops mode unicastOnly 0 fabric ops mode useCsCtl 0 fabric...

Page 146: ...Fabric OS Commands 146 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also agtcfgShow configure diagDisablePost diagEnablePost ipAddrShow licenseShow syslogdIpShow ...

Page 147: ...n contains the switch boot parameters It has variables such as the switch s name and IP address This section corresponds to the first few lines of output of the configShow command The second section contains general switch configuration variables such as diagnostic settings fabric configuration settings and SNMP settings This section corresponds to the output of the configShow command after the fi...

Page 148: ...operand is optional user Specify a user name in quotation marks for example jdoe This user name is used to gain access to the host This operand is optional file Specify a file name in quotation marks for example config txt Absolute path names may be specified using forward slash Relative path names create the file in the user s home directory on UNIX hosts and in the directory where the FTP server...

Page 149: ...ion 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide The user does not have permission on the host The user runs a script that prints something at login The FTP server is not running on the host See Also configDefault configDownload configShow configure ...

Page 150: ...Zoning operation parameters RSCN transmission mode NS pre zoning mode Arbitrated Loop parameters System services Portlog events enable Note For V3 1 x do not run this command on an operational switch First disable the switch using the switchDisable command For V4 1 x this command can now be executed on an enabled switch If executed on an enabled switch only a subset of the full parameter set is av...

Page 151: ...s to allow formation of the fabric The Fabric parameters are as follows Return When entered at a prompt with no preceding input accepts the default value if applicable and moves to the next prompt Interrupt Ctrl C Aborts the command immediately and ignores all changes made This keystroke is common on many computers but can be different on your system End of file Ctrl D When entered at a prompt wit...

Page 152: ...D_TOV to determine switch actions when presented with an error condition Allocated circuit resources with detected errors are not released until the time value has expired If the condition is resolved prior to the time out the internal time out clock resets and waits for the next error condition E_D_TOV Error Detect Time Out Value E_D_TOV is displayed in milliseconds This timer is used to flag a p...

Page 153: ...is not selected enabled or 0 the switch port will issue RLS Extended Link Service to the attached devices every four seconds to collect link status data Otherwise RLS will not be sent to the devices RLS Probing is selected by default disabled or 1 Suppress Class F Traffic When this mode is set to 1 all class F interswitch frames are transmitted as class 2 frames This is to support remote fabrics w...

Page 154: ...coded Address Mode and Core Switch PID Format are mutually exclusive They cannot both be enabled at the same time All switches in the fabric must have this parameter set the same Per frame Route Priority In addition to the eight virtual channels used in frame routing priority support is also available for per frame based prioritization when this value is set When Per frame Route Priority is set to...

Page 155: ...er field is as follows VC Priority Specifies the class of frame traffic given priority for a Virtual Channel Disable NodeName Zone Checking Specify 1 to disable using Node WWN when specifying nodes in the zone database or specify 0 to enable using Node WWN when specifying nodes in the zone data The default value is 0 ...

Page 156: ... Mode Specify 0 for Standard Mode or 1 for Pre zoning On The default value is 0 Table 4 Configure Command Arbitrated Loop Settings Field Default Range Alternate BB Credit V4 1 x only 0 0 or 1 Send FAN frames 1 0 or 1 Enable CLOSE on OPEN received 0 0 or 1 Always send RSCN 1 0 or 1 Do Not Allow AL_PA 0x00 0 0 or 1 Initialize All Looplets V3 1 x only 0 0 or 1 Send FAN frames Specifies that fabric ad...

Page 157: ...including the ones not in the same zone are always re initialized This is required for certain RAID subsystems to work properly during failover Table 5 Configure Command System Services Parameters Field Default Range rstatd Off On Off rusersd Off On Off telnetd V4 1 x only On On Off rapid On On Off thad On On Off Disable RLS probing On On Off rstatd Dynamically enables or disables a server that re...

Page 158: ...ivalent command telnetd V4 1 x only Used to enable or disable the telnet interface to a switch If you are using SSH to manage a switch you can disable the telnet interface for greater security The default value is on telnet is enabled rapid Dynamically enables or disables a service that handles RPC requests for the API server The default value is on thad Dynamically enables or disables the thresho...

Page 159: ...ransmitted On On Off errlog a message is added to the error log On On Off loopscn a loop state change notification On On Off create a task is created On On Off debug generic debug info On On Off nbrfsm neighbor state transition On On Off timer timer On On Off sn speed negotiation state On On Off fcin Fibre Channel input V4 1 x only On On Off fcout Fibre Channel ouput V4 1 x only On On Off read Fib...

Page 160: ... exchange error V4 1 x only On On Off xstate exchange state V4 1 x only On On Off seq sequence V4 1 x only On On Off seqst sequence state V4 1 x only On On Off iu iu V4 1 x only On On Off payload frame payload V4 1 x only On On Off reconf fabric reconfiguration V3 1 x only On On Off LR1 LR2 V3 1 x only On On Off zone zone requrest response V4 1 x only On On Off cmd fss command log V4 1 x only On O...

Page 161: ... SYNC IO mode 0 1 0 VC Encoded Address Mode 0 1 0 1 Core Switch PID Format 0 1 0 Per frame Route Priority 0 1 0 Long Distance Fabric 0 1 0 BB credit 1 27 16 Virtual Channel parameters yes y no n no yes VC Priority 2 2 3 2 VC Priority 3 2 3 2 VC Priority 4 2 3 2 VC Priority 5 2 3 2 VC Priority 6 2 3 3 Switch Operating Mode yes y no n no n Zoning Operation parameters yes y no n no n RSCN Transmissio...

Page 162: ...Fabric OS Commands 162 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also configDefault configShow ifShow ipAddrSet syslogdIp syslogdipshow ...

Page 163: ...omponents from the main board to the SFP from the SFP to the fiber cable from the fiber cable to the SFP and from the SFP back to the main board With the lb_mode operand set to 1 it is also possible to test ports with loopback plugs that connect each port back to itself The cables can be connected to any port combination as long as the cables and SFPs connected are of the same technology For examp...

Page 164: ...e 8 Check if the number of frames transmitted is not equal to the number of frames received 9 Repeat steps 3 through 8 for all ports present until a The number of frames requested is reached b All ports are marked bad At each pass the frame is created from a different data type There are seven data types 1 CSPAT 0x7e 0x7e 0x7e 0x7e 2 BYTE_LFSR 0x69 0x01 0x02 0x05 3 CHALF_SQ 0x4a 0x4a 0x4a 0x4a 4 Q...

Page 165: ...un this test In SwitchDisabled SwitchOffline mode when the switch is disabled prior to executing the crossPortTest command all ports are assumed to be cable loopbacked to different ports in the same switch If one or more ports are not connected the test aborts The test determines which port is connected to which port transmitting frames If any ports are not properly connected improperly seated SFP...

Page 166: ...to activate SFP mode by executing the following command prior to executing the crossPortTest command switch admin setsfpmode 1 When activated only ports with SFPs present are tested by the crossporttest command For example if only port 0 and port 3 contain SFPs and the SFP mode is activated the crossporttest command limits testing to port 0 and 3 The state of SFP mode is saved in non volatile memo...

Page 167: ...nd to test ports that are cable loopbacked port M is connected to port M in addition to the cross connection ports port M is connected to port N slot number V4 1 x only Specify the slot number in a StorageWorks Core switch The slot number must be followed by a slash and the port number The StorageWorks Core switch has a total of 10 slots counted from 1 to 10 Slot number 5 and 6 are control process...

Page 168: ... depends upon the loopback mode selected When speed modes 3 6 are used with cables they must be connected even to odd or the test will fail 0 set all ports speed for auto negotiate 1 set all ports speed to lock at 1 Gbps 2 set all port s speed to lock at 2 Gbps For lb_mode set to 0 one of the following speed modes are available to test the speed negotiation 3 set all even ports speed for AN set al...

Page 169: ... all of the user ports in the current switch or logical switch will be tested This option may be used to restrict testing to the specified ports switch admin crossporttest 100 1 Running Cross Port Test One moment please switchName switch switchType 2 2 switchState Testing switchRole Disabled switchDomain 1 unconfirmed switchId fffc01 switchWwn 10 00 00 60 69 00 73 71 port 0 cu Testing Loopback 15 ...

Page 170: ...RR_STATS ERR_STATS_2LONG ERR_STATS_BADEOF ERR_STATS_BADOS ERR_STATS_C3DISC ERR_STATS_CRC ERR_STATS_ENCIN ERR_STATS_ENCOUT ERR_STATS_TRUNC ERR_STAT_2LONG ERR_STAT_BADEOF ERR_STAT_BADOS ERR_STAT_C3DISC ERR_STAT_CRC ERR_STAT_ENCIN ERR_STAT_ENCOUT ERR_STAT_TRUNC FDET_PERR FINISH_MSG_ERR FTPRT_STATUS_ERR INIT LESSN_STATUS_ERR MBUF_STATE_ERR MBUF_STATUS_ERR NO_SEGMENT PORT_ABSENT PORT_DIED PORT_ENABLE P...

Page 171: ...PortTest 171 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide STATS_FTX TIMEOUT XMIT See Also camTest centralmemorytest cmemretentiontest emitest portLoopbackTest portRegTest ramTest spinSilk sramRetentionTest ...

Page 172: ...Availability All users Release V3 1 x and V4 1 x Description Displays sample data streams types used in diagnostic commands There are 19 different sample data types The command displays an example of each data stream Operands For V3 1 x none For V4 1 x this command has the following operand dataTypeShow seed value Specify the data pattern seed value If no seed is specified then a seed value of 0 i...

Page 173: ...0 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0a 0b 0c 0d 0e 0f Word Ramp 8 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 Quad Ramp 9 00000000 00000001 00000002 00000003 Byte LFSR 10 69 01 02 05 0b 17 2f 5e bd 7b f6 ec d8 b0 60 c0 Random 11 62 39 29 18 08 01 e8 d9 c9 ba aa 9b 8b 84 94 a5 CRPAT 12 bc bc 23 47 6b 8f b3 d7 fb 14 36 59 bc bc 23 47 CSPAT 13 7e 7e 7e 7e 7e 7e 7e 7e 7e 7e 7e 7e 7e 7e 7e 7e CHALF_SQ 14 4a 4a 4a...

Page 174: ...vents in the various logs for example the error log and the port log In order to enable Secure Mode the fabric must be synchronized Every switch in the fabric must receive a fabric timestamp from the Primary FCS switch Use this command with no operands to display the local switch date and time Use the newdate operand to set the date and time This command sets the a common date and time for the ent...

Page 175: ...es are 00 59 yy is the year valid values are 00 99 Year values greater than 69 are interpreted as 1970 1999 year values less than 70 are interpreted as 2000 2069 The date function does not support daylight saving time or time zones All switches maintain current date and time in non volatile memory Date and time are used for logging events Switch operation does not depend on the date and time a swi...

Page 176: ...Fabric OS Commands 176 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also errLogShow portLogShow tsclockserver tstimezone uptime ...

Page 177: ... name is specified display debug and verbosity levels of all modules Operands This command has the following operand Example The following example shows how to use dbgshow to display information about a specific module named NS dbgshow module_name Specify the name of the module where you want to view the debug and verbosity levels Module names are case sensitive This operand is optional switch adm...

Page 178: ...Fabric OS Commands 178 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also setdbg ...

Page 179: ... OK The current flag settings are displayed by using the diagShow command This command resets the flag to allow the bad port to be retested otherwise the test skips the port This command does not clear the error log entry Instead it generates the following DIAG CLEAR_ERR message for each port software flag cleared For example the following message is for a sample message displayed in the error cle...

Page 180: ...t to clear diagnostic error messages This operand is optional slot slot V4 1 x only Specify the slot to clear the diagnostic failure status This operand is optional switch switch V4 1 x only Specify the logical switch number to operate on If omitted then all blades will be cleared This operand is optional all V4 1 x only If specified all blades will be cleared switch admin diagclearerror 1 0x1bcb ...

Page 181: ...ersion 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Displays a list of diagnostic commands Synopsis diagCommandShow Availability Admin Release V4 1 x Description Use this command to display a list of diagnostic commands Operands None diagCommandShow ...

Page 182: ...tatypeshow Display available data patterns portregtest Port register diagnostic mulregdump Dump the contents of the general purpose registers ramdump Dump the contents of specified RAM register or all sramretentiontest SRAM Data Retention diagnostic spinsilk Cross connected line speed exerciser spinjitter line speed jitter measurement crossporttest Cross connected port diagnostic portloopbacktest ...

Page 183: ...mory and POST remains disabled until it is enabled using the diagEnablePost command A reboot is not required for this command to take effect A switch rebooted without POST enabled issues the following DIAG POSTSKIPPED error message 0x10fc0c10 tSwitch Apr 6 13 24 42 Error DIAG POST_SKIPPED 3 Skipped POST tests assuming all ports are healthy Err 0004 It is recommended that POST always be enabled to ...

Page 184: ...c OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Example To disable the POST execution at reboot See Also diaghelp diagEnablePost switch admin diagdisablepost Committing configuration done On next reboot POST will be skipped switch admin ...

Page 185: ...ST executed after a cold boot a power cycle of the switch runs longer than POST executed after warm boot executing reboot on a powered up switch The cold boot POST runs more data patterns during the ramtest Diagnostic POST divides into two separate phases POST Phase I and POST Phase II POST Phase I mainly tests hardware soundness and POST Phase II tests system functionality A reboot is not require...

Page 186: ...e switch during the power on stage The factory default enables POST execution Operands None Example To enable the POST during future power ups See Also camtest centralmemorytest cmitest diaghelp diagDisablePost ramtest portloopbacktest portregtest switch admin diagenablepost Committing configuration done On next reboot POST will be executed switch admin ...

Page 187: ... of the functional test methods to disable testing on the specified list of ports when ESD mode is enabled see setesdmode The exact type of port list and the exact use of this list are determined by each test method The mode becomes active as soon as this command is executed It does not require a reboot to take effect Operands This command has the following operands diagesdports itemlist Specify t...

Page 188: ... 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Example To add ports 1 through 3 to the ESD Idle port list See Also diaghelp switch admin diagesdports 1 3 ESD Idle Port list is now 1 3 Config update Succeeded switch admin diagesdports show ESD Idle Port list is 1 3 ...

Page 189: ...1 so that the tests will abort on the first failure The exact use of this configuration setting depends on the test method The new fail limit mode becomes active as soon as this command is executed It does not require a reboot to take effect Operands This command has the following operands If no operand is specified the current value is displayed diagfaillimit limit Specify the number of failures ...

Page 190: ... OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Example To change the fail limit from 1 to 5 See Also diaghelp switch admin diagfaillimit Fail Limit is 1 switch admin diagfaillimit 5 Fail Limit is now 5 Config update Succeeded switch admin ...

Page 191: ...lity All users Release V3 1 x and V4 1 x Description Use this command to display diagnostic command information Operands For V3 1 x none For V4 1 x this command has the following operand diagHelp name command Specify a command name to display more detailed information This operand displays a parameter list and subtest information and diagnostic error codes if available ...

Page 192: ...ionTest Central Mem Data Retention diagnostic crossPortTest Cross connected port diagnostic txdPathTest TXA TXD connection diagnostic spinSilk Cross connected line speed exerciser diagClearError Clear diag error on specified port diagDisablePost Disable Power On Self Test diagEnablePost Enable Power On Self Test setGbicMode Enable tests only on ports with GBICs setSplbMode Enable 0 Dual 1 Single p...

Page 193: ... ID to the corresponding AL_PA and used as the port address for any diagnostics that operate in FL port mode The mode becomes active as soon as this command is executed It does not require a reboot to take effect Operands This command has the following operands If no operand is specified the current value is displayed diagloopid id Specify the loop Id for FL mode diagnostics This operand is option...

Page 194: ...rsion 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Example To change the loop id from 125 to 120 See Also diaghelp switch admin diagloopid FL mode Loop ID is 125 switch admin diagloopid 120 FL mode Loop ID is now 120 Config update Succeeded switch admin ...

Page 195: ...ive as soon as this command is executed It does not require a reboot to take effect Print mode when enabled will cause extra messages to be displayed in the burn in and post scripts The exact behavior varies depending on the script being run Operands This command has the following operands If no operand is specified the current value is displayed diagmodepr mode Specify 1 to enable print mode spec...

Page 196: ... 1 x Reference Guide Example To enable print mode messages See Also diaghelp switch admin diagmodepr show Diagnostic Print Mode is currently disabled switch admin diagmodepr 1 Config update Succeeded Diagnostic Print Mode is now enabled switch admin ...

Page 197: ...active as soon as this command is executed It does not require a reboot to take effect Post mode modifies the behavior of the diagnostics daemon program to inhibit testing of switch blades when the system is first powered on or a new blade is added Operands This command has the following operands If no operand is specified the current value is displayed diagpost mode Specify 1 to enable POST test ...

Page 198: ...erence Guide Example To enable and then disable the POST test See Also diagdisablepost diagenablepost switch admin diagpost 1 Config update Succeeded Post disable is now 0 Enabled san95 admin diagpost 0 Config update Succeeded Post disable is now 1 Disabled ...

Page 199: ...t require a reboot to take effect Retry mode when enabled modifies the behavior of the diagnostic test methods POST and burn in scripts The exact behavior depends on the tests and scripts that are run but the most common result is that spinsilk tests are skipped when retry mode is enabled Operands This command has the following operands If no operand is specified the current value is displayed dia...

Page 200: ... x Reference Guide Example To view the current retry mode value See Also diaghelp switch admin diagretry show Diagnostic Retry Mode is currently disabled switch admin diagretry 1 Config update Succeeded Diagnostic Retry Mode is now enabled switch admin ...

Page 201: ...non volatile memory The activity log of the script is saved in var log scriptname slot log The errors produced are available from burninerrshow command on a per blade basis When power cycles occur the burnin activity is restarted at the test that was interrupted at the time of the power cycle This command does not require a reboot to take effect Operands This command has the following operands dia...

Page 202: ...in settings for a switch See Also diagsetcycle diagstopburnin switch admin diagsetburnin slot 1 current existing script is fabos share switchess sh Burnin mode is Enabled Removing all log files in var log for slot 1 Slot 1 burnin name is now fabos share switchess sh Config update Succeeded switch admin ...

Page 203: ... be updated non interactively too In interactive mode the current value default value and description of purpose of the variable are displayed for each variable If no new value is specified then the current value is left unchanged If a new value is entered then its value is updated and stored in the configuration database for that blade type It does not require a reboot to take effect Operands Thi...

Page 204: ...yword to update and the value should be specified manually in this case switch admin diagsetcycle switchburnin sh show CURRENT KEYWORD DEFAULT 1 number_of_runs 1 2 vib 2 10 thermal 10 BURNIN label BURNIN 1 tbr_passes 1 1 prt_on 1 1 cntmem_on 1 1 cmi_on 1 1 cam_on 1 50 flt_passes 50 25 sta_passes 25 100 plb_nframes 100 50 txd_nframes 50 200 xpt_nframes 200 20 bpt_nframes 20 50 slk_nmegs 50 30 bpt_a...

Page 205: ...of blade or user ports The following information is displayed The state of all ports in the switch based on the results of diagnostic executions since the last reboot Ports which passed diag testing are marked OK Ports which failed one or more diag tests are marked BAD The current state of the ports active ports are shown as UP and inactive ports are shown as DN The frame counts of active ports Th...

Page 206: ... executes diagshow every 4 seconds continuously until stopped by a keyboard interrupt This may be used to isolate a bad SFP A port with changing LLI_errs value prefixed by indicates port is detecting more errors Operands This command has the following operands nSeconds V3 1 x only Specify the display interval in seconds between repeated executions of diagShow The default value if no operand is spe...

Page 207: ...blade 7 See Also diaghelp switch admin diagshow Diagnostics Status Fri Feb 08 15 25 24 2002 Slot 1 UPORTS Port BPort Diag Active Speed 0 15 OK UP 2G Auto 1 14 OK UP 2G Auto 2 13 OK UP 2G Auto 3 12 OK UP 2G Auto 4 31 OK UP 2G Auto 5 30 OK UP 2G Auto 6 29 OK UP 2G Auto 7 28 OK UP 2G Auto 8 47 OK UP 2G Auto output truncated ...

Page 208: ...de becomes active as soon as this command is executed It does not require a reboot to take effect Displays the time mode when enabled causes each test to display elapsed time messages It is normally used during burn in and for test method debug Operands This command has the following operands If no operand is specified the current value is displayed diagshowtime mode Specify 1 to enable show time ...

Page 209: ...on 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Example To enable show time mode See Also diaghelp switch admin diagshowtime Show Time mode is 0 Disabled switch admin diagshowtime 1 Config update Succeeded Show Time mode is now 1 Enabled switch admin ...

Page 210: ...ys in that mode until the next execution of diagsilkworm The mode becomes active as soon as this command is executed It does not require a reboot to take effect Silkworm mode when enabled notifies the diagnostics environment and test methods that the tests are running in silkworm mode For proper operation FCSW mode must also be disabled Caution This mode may not be used by burn in or POST scripts ...

Page 211: ...e To enable silkworm mode See Also diaghelp mode Specify 1 to enable silkworm mode specify 0 to disable silkworm mode This operand is optional show Specify this operand to display the current mode setting This operand is optional switch admin diagsilkworm Silkworm mode is 0 Disabled switch admin diagsilkworm 1 Config update Succeeded Silkworm mode is now 1 Enabled san95 admin ...

Page 212: ...e becomes active as soon as this command is executed It does not require a reboot to take effect The skip test flags are used to skip the execution of certain POST tests that may prove hazardous to normal switch operation The exact use of this flag is determined by the post scripts and the specific test methods that are used Operands This command has the following operands If no operand is specifi...

Page 213: ... x 4 1 x Reference Guide Example The following is an example of the diagskiptests command See Also diaghelp switch admin diagskiptests show Skip tests is 0 switch admin diagskiptests 1 Config update Succeeded Skip tests is now 1 switch admin ...

Page 214: ...mine which PID is running burn in on a blade and terminate that activity It is expected that the burn in script handles the logging cleanup This command does not require a reboot to take effect Operands This command has the following operand diagstopburnin slot slot Specify the slot to stop burn in If no slot is specified this command executes on all slots in the logical switch This operand is opt...

Page 215: ...9 14 42 18 Switch 0 Error DIAG MANUAL1 1 1 Starting switchess Err 0140042 0100 101 000 001 24 37 0xc84 fabos Dec 20 08 57 27 Switch 0 Error DIAG MANUAL1 1 1 switchess ABORT Err 0140042 0100 101 000 000 25 41 0x1b61 fabos Feb 07 19 02 28 Switch 0 Error DIAG MANUAL1 1 1 Starting switchess Err 0140042 0100 101 000 001 26 39 0x47ff fabos Feb 07 21 45 36 Switch 0 Error DIAG MANUAL1 1 1 switchess ABORT ...

Page 216: ... occurs A change in the fabric is defined as an E_Port going up or down or an Fx_Port going up or down If DLS is turned off using dlsReset load sharing is performed only at boot time or when an Fx_Port comes up Optimal load sharing is rarely achieved with DLS disabled If DLS is turned on using dlsSet routing changes can affect working ports For example if an Fx_Port goes down another Fx_Port may b...

Page 217: ...rded This period of time is significantly shorter than when IOD is on and is usually less than 1 second Use this command only if devices connected to the fabric cannot handle occasional routing changes Operands None Examples To disable the dynamic load sharing option See Also dlsSet dlsShow switch admin dlsReset Committing configuration done switch admin dlsShow DLS is not set switch admin ...

Page 218: ...ed as an E_Port going up or down or an Fx_Port going up or down If DLS is turned off using dlsReset load sharing is performed only at boot time or when an Fx_Port comes up Optimal load sharing is rarely achieved with DLS disabled If DLS is turned on using dlsSet routing changes can affect working ports For example if an Fx_Port goes down another Fx_Port may be rerouted from one E_Port to a differe...

Page 219: ...l a short period of time when traffic is not forwarded This period of time is significantly shorter than when IOD is on and is usually less than 1 second Operands None Examples To enable the dynamic load sharing option See Also dlsReset dlsShow switch admin dlsSet Committing configuration done switch admin dlsShow DLS is set switch admin ...

Page 220: ...hether DLS is on or off There can be two messages displayed Operands None Example To display the current DLS option setting See Also dlsSet dlsReset dlsShow DLS is set The DLS option is turned on Load sharing is reconfigured with every change in the fabric DLS is not set The DLS option is turned off Load sharing is only reconfigured when the switch is rebooted or an Fx_Port comes up switch admin d...

Page 221: ...e namely domain name and the name server IP address for primary and secondary name servers Operands None Example To set the DNS parameters for the system dnsconfig switch admin dnsconfig Enter option 1 to display current Domain Name Service configuration 2 to set DNS configuration Enter choice 2 Enter Domain Name none mydomain com Enter nameserver IP address in dot notation 11 22 33 44 Enter names...

Page 222: ...Fabric OS Commands 222 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also ipaddrset ipaddrshow ...

Page 223: ...or log for a particular switch instance If no operand is specified this command clears the error log in RAM The persistent error log is not cleared However if p option is specified ONLY the persistent error log is cleared and the error log in RAM is not cleared Operands For V3 1 x none For V4 1 x this command has the following operand errClear p Clear messages ONLY from the persistent error log Er...

Page 224: ...ng example shows how to clear the error log To clear the persistent error log on the Active CP using V4 1 x use the p operand See Also errDump errNvLogSizeSet errNvLogSizeShow errShow switch admin errclear 0x102ed690 tShell Nov 22 15 09 38 INFO SYS LOGCLRD 4 Error log cleared switch admin ...

Page 225: ...y recorded in the persistent error log and error events logged in the current run time cycle This command also provides options to display ONLY those error event messages that are saved in the persistent error log or ONLY those messages generated during the current run time cycle All important error log messages regardless of their message severity level are stored in a persistent storage as they ...

Page 226: ...ror log This displays the error log messages generated during the current run time cycle p Displays messages from the persistent error log switch switch admin errDump Error 03 0x2a5 fabos Jun 14 12 03 51 Switch 0 Debug HAMKERNEL IP_UP 5 session 3 Heartbeat up from Standby CP Error 02 0x2a5 fabos Jun 14 12 03 50 Switch 0 Info HAM REDUNDANT_INFO 4 Heartbeat Up System in REDUNDANT state Error 01 0x28...

Page 227: ...ecution of this command Operands This command has the following operand Example The following example shows how to resize the persistent error log to 1500 entries errNvLogSizeSet number_of_entries Specify the new persistent error log size in unit of number of error log entries The error log can be resized within the specified limits This command fails if an attempt is made to change the persistent...

Page 228: ...Fabric OS Commands 228 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also errNvLogSizeShow errSaveLvlShow errShow ...

Page 229: ...command to show the current maximum size of the persistent error log Note The configuration of the persistent error log on the active CP is independent of the configuration on the standby CP Operands None Example The following example shows how to display persistent error log configuration See Also errNvLogSizeSet errSaveLvlShow errShow errNvLogSizeShow switch admin errNvLogSizeShow Persistent Err...

Page 230: ...of type Panic and Critical are saved in the persistent log If you want to save messages of log levels less severe than Critical use this command to specify a new message save level This new message save level is not persistent across a reboot It is in effect only for that run time cycle Operands This command has the following operand errSaveLvlSet lvl Message severity level Save those error log me...

Page 231: ... 4 1 x Reference Guide Example The following example shows how to enable saving of Warning Critical Error and Panic messages in the persistent error log See Also errDump errNvLogSizeSet errSaveLvlSet errSaveLvlShow switch admin errSaveLvlSet 3 ...

Page 232: ... 1 x Description Use this command to find out the current value of the persistent error log save level for a given switch instance Operands None Example Following example shows how to display current error log save level See Also errNvLogSizeSet errNvLogSizeShow errSaveLvlSet errShow errSaveLvlShow switch admin errsavelvlshow Current message save level is 1 switch admin ...

Page 233: ...un time cycles and the display of error event messages logged in the current run time cycle This command also provides options to display ONLY those error log messages that are saved in the persistent log and to display ONLY those messages that are logged during the current run time cycle All important error log messages regardless of their message severity level are stored in a persistent storage...

Page 234: ...AG BUS_TIMEOUT 0415 portRegTest DIAG REGERR 0416 portRegTest DIAG REGERR_UNRST 0B0F sramRetentionTest DIAG BUS_TIMEOUT 0B15 sramRetentionTest DIAG REGERR 0B16 sramRetentionTest DIAG REGERR_UNRST 0FA0 turboRamTest1 DIAG TBRAM_WTEST 0FA1 turboRamTest1 DIAG TBRAM_INC_WRTEST 0FA2 turboRamTest1 DIAG TBRAM_DEC_WRTEST 1020 centralMemoryTest DIAG CMBISRTO 1021 centralMemoryTest DIAG CMBISRF 1025 centralMe...

Page 235: ...t DIAG CAMSID 2271 camTest DIAG XMIT 2640 portLoopbackTest DIAG ERRSTAT ENCIN 2641 portLoopbackTest DIAG ERRSTAT CRC 2642 portLoopbackTest DIAG ERRSTAT TRUNC 2643 portLoopbackTest DIAG ERRSTAT 2LONG 2644 portLoopbackTest DIAG ERRSTAT BADEOF 2645 portLoopbackTest DIAG ERRSTAT ENCOUT 2646 portLoopbackTest DIAG ERRSTAT BADORD 2647 portLoopbackTest DIAG ERRSTAT DISCC3 264F portLoopbackTest DIAG INIT 2...

Page 236: ...AT DISCC3 304F crossPortTest DIAG INIT 305F crossPortTest DIAG PORTDIED 3060 crossPortTest DIAG STATS FTX 3061 crossPortTest DIAG STATS FRX 3062 crossPortTest DIAG STATS C3FRX 306E crossPortTest DIAG DATA 306F crossPortTest DIAG TIMEOUT 3070 crossPortTest DIAG PORTABSENT 3071 crossPortTest DIAG XMIT 3078 crossPortTest DIAG PORTWRONG 3840 spinSilk DIAG ERRSTAT ENCIN 3841 spinSilk1 DIAG ERRSTAT CRC ...

Page 237: ...ED 3870 spinSilk DIAG PORTABSENT 3871 spinSilk DIAG XMIT 3874 spinSilk DIAG PORTSTOPPED 1 V3 1 x only 2 V4 1 x only Table 7 Diagnostic Error Codes Sheet 4 of 4 Error Number Test Error Type a Displays messages from the active error log This displays the error log messages generated during the current run time cycle p Displays messages from the persistent error log switch admin errshow Error 14 0x30...

Page 238: ...Fabric OS Commands 238 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also errDump errNvLogSizeSet errNvLogSizeShow errSaveLvlSet errSaveLvlShow uptime ...

Page 239: ...ommand to logout from a telnet rlogin or serial port session Telnet and rlogin connections are closed the serial port returns to the login prompt The commands exit and quit are accepted as synonyms for logout as is a Ctrl D typed at the beginning of a line Operands None Example To exit from a shell session See Also logout exit switch admin exit Connection to host lost ...

Page 240: ...t data and also any pending commands if applicable The following information is displayed fabportshow Port Displays the port number State The state of the port P0 Port Offline P1 Port Online P2 ELP ACC Received P3 Link Reset Done I0 Trunk Initiator EMT Sent I1 Trunk Initiator ETP ACC Received I2 Trunk Initiator ETP Sent I3 Trunk Initiator Link Reset T0 Trunk Target EMT Received T1 Trunk Target ETP...

Page 241: ...0100000 LR Pending due to ELP RJT rcv 0x00200000 Received a DIA on this port 0x00400000 Port is the EMT Initiator 0x00800000 Security violation 0x01000000 Security incompatibility 0x02000000 Rcv a DIA ACC nbrWWN Neighboring switch s WWN red_ports All E Ports that are connected to the same neighboring switch slotnumber Specify the slot number for a StorageWorks Core switch For all other switches th...

Page 242: ...e To display fabric port information See Also portshow switch admin fabportshow 4 14 Fabric Port Information Port 62 State P3 List 0x10068418 List Count 0 Flags 0x280120 nbrWWN 10 00 00 60 69 80 06 cf red_ports 10 11 62 63 Open commands pending No commands pending switch admin ...

Page 243: ...ric commands The first line of display shows SW_ISL ISL ports Each line below shows the retry count for the following fabric commands Operands None fabretryshow ELP EFP DIA RDI BF RSCN FWD EMT GAID INQ Exchange Link Parameters Exchange Fabric Parameters Domain Identifier Assigned Request Domain Identifier Build Fabric Remote State Change Notification Fabric Controller Forward Fabric Controller Mar...

Page 244: ...xample To display the retry count of Fabric OS commands See Also fabstatsshow switch user fabretryshow E_Ports SW_ILS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ELP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EMT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ETP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EFP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 AAI 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RDI 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 BF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ...

Page 245: ...a fabric but they do not provide an absolute guarantee that a switch requesting to be the principal switch will actually achieve this status When dealing with larger fabrics the selection of the principal switch is less deterministic In these cases to help ensure that the desired switch is selected as the principal switch a small selection of switches should be connected together first followed by...

Page 246: ...1 0 Specify 1 to enable principal switch mode or specify 0 to disable principal switch mode the mode activates when the fabric rebuilds This operand is optional switch admin fabricprincipal q Principal Selection Mode Enable switch admin fabricprincipal 0 Principal Selection Mode disaable switch admin fabricprincipal 1 Principal Selection Mode enabled switch admin fabricprincipal f 1 Principal Sele...

Page 247: ...es may not be shown Otherwise the following fields are shown Multicast alias groups are created on demand by request from N_Ports attached to the alias server typically no groups are listed If multicast alias groups exist the following information is shown fabricShow Switch ID The switch Domain_ID and embedded port D_ID World Wide Name The switch WWN Enet IP Addr The switch Ethernet IP address FC ...

Page 248: ...ast alias group See Also switchShow switch admin fabricShow Switch ID Worldwide Name Enet IP Addr FC IP Addr Name 3 fffc43 10 00 00 60 69 10 60 1f 192 168 64 187 0 0 0 0 sw187 2 fffc42 10 00 00 60 69 00 05 91 192 168 64 60 192 168 65 60 sw60 1 fffc41 10 00 00 60 69 00 02 0b 192 168 64 180 192 168 65 180 sw180 0 fffc40 10 00 00 60 69 00 06 56 192 168 64 59 192 168 65 59 sw5 The Fabric has 4 switche...

Page 249: ...ility Admin Release V4 1 x Description Use this command to clear the queue of fabric state information logged by the fabric Operands None Example To clear the fabric state information See Also fabstateshow fabstateclear switch admin fabstateclear switch admin fabstateshow Time Stamp Input and Action S P Sn Pn Port Xid switch admin ...

Page 250: ...n Pn Port Xid 10 58 35 185 BF Rcv A2 P3 A2 P3 4 0x287 10 58 35 185 Change State A2 NA F0 NA NA NA 10 58 35 185 BF sending ACC F0 P3 F0 P3 4 0x287 10 58 35 197 Canceling All Node Timers F0 NA F0 NA NA NA 10 58 35 198 BF Flood F0 NA F0 NA NA NA 10 58 35 200 BF Send F0 P3 F0 P3 40 0x253 10 58 35 200 BF Flood Done F0 NA F0 NA NA NA 10 58 35 200 Cancel 2 F_S_TOV Timer F0 NA F0 NA NA NA 10 58 35 204 Can...

Page 251: ...fabstateshow 251 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also fabstateclear fabportshow ...

Page 252: ...scription Use this command to display the statistics information of fabric The information displayed is as follows Number of times a switch domain ID has been forcibly changed Number of E_Port offline transitions Number of fabric reconfigurations Number of fabric segmentations due to Loopback Incompatibility Overlap Zoning Routing Licensing Disabling E_Port Operands None fabStatsShow ...

Page 253: ...mpShow switch admin fabstatsshow Description Count Port Time Domain ID forcibly changed 0 E_Port offline transitions 0 Reconfigurations 0 Segmentations due to Loopback 2 Incompatibility 0 Overlap 0 Zoning 3 Routing 6 Licensing 0 Disabling E_Port 0 Incompatible platform DB 0 Security violation 0 Security incompatibility 0 switch admin ...

Page 254: ...witch state structure information Synopsis fabswitchshow Availability All users Release V4 1 x Description Use this command to display the fabric switch state structure information This command is strictly for debugging purpose It is not intended as a user command Operands None fabswitchshow ...

Page 255: ...4 Principal Wwn 10 00 00 60 69 00 54 e8 Principal Prioritry 0x2 Flags 0x8 inq_sem count 1 dbg_sem count 1 fab_q current count 0 fab_q high water 16 fab_q age 0 sec dup xid occurance 0 last message 14 47 57 029 RSCN Rcv addr 0x51080b00 A2 NA A2 NA NA NA reachable domains 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 14 15 16 17 18 16 domains reachable Ports used for EFP BF DIA flood 4 42 Command Statistics command high...

Page 256: ...is command to disable a non faulty fan unit by setting the RPM speed to 0 Operand This command has the following operand Example To disable a fan unit See Also fanShow fanEnable fanDisable unit Specify the fan s unit number View the fan unit numbers using the fanShow command This operand is required san95 admin fandisable 1 Fan unit 1 has been disabled switch admin ...

Page 257: ...has been previously disabled using the fanDisable command Operand This command has the following operand Example To enable a fan that has been disabled fanEnable unit Specify the fan s unit number View the fan unit numbers using the fanShow command This operand is required switch admin fanenable 1 Fan unit 1 has been enabled switch admin fanshow Fan 1 is OK speed is 2237 RPM Fan 2 is OK speed is 2...

Page 258: ...Fabric OS Commands 258 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also fanShow fanDisable ...

Page 259: ...ccording to the switch model and number of fans Some switch models show fan speed measured in RPM revolutions per minute Fan status is shown as Note The output from this command varies depending on switch type and number of fans present Operands None fanShow OK Fan is functioning correctly absent Fan is not present below minimum Fan is present but rotating too slowly or stopped unknown Unknown fan...

Page 260: ... x 4 1 x Reference Guide Example To display the status and RPMs for the fans See Also fanDisable fanEnable psShow tempShow switch admin fanShow Fan 1 is OK speed is 2721 RPM Fan 2 is OK speed is 2721 RPM Fan 3 is OK speed is 2657 RPM switch admin ...

Page 261: ...tatus will all be displayed The message No Fabric Assist Host Ports on this Switch is displayed if Fabric Assist is disabled or if there are no Fabric Assist host ports on the switch If the switch was unable to assign a phantom for the target then the message No Phantom will be displayed in the Status column This switch will be unable to create a phantom if there are no available AL_PAs on the loo...

Page 262: ...ntom ALPA for the target PREF_ALPA The preferred ALPA given for the target Status The Online Offline status of the target switch admin fashow Fabric Assist Mode Enabled Port PID Fabric Assist Target ALPA PREF_ALPA Status 00 0x011001 Online 0x011498 0xef 0xef Online 0x011497 0x97 Online 0x011490 0x90 Online 0x01148f 0x8f Online 0x011488 0x88 Online 0x011484 0x84 Online 0x011482 0x82 Online 0x011481...

Page 263: ...fashow 263 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also fazonecreate fastatsshow ...

Page 264: ...ssist zoning This command also displays the total number of LIPs that were initiated by Fabric Assist and which Fabric Assist PID caused the LIP to be sent The message No Fabric Assist Host Ports on this Switch is displayed if Fabric Assist is disabled or if there are no Fabric Assist host ports on the switch Each line of output shows Operands None faStatsShow port The port number of the Fabric As...

Page 265: ...4 1 x Reference Guide Example This example shows three Fabric Assist host ports on the switch See Also fazoneCreate faShow sw1 admin faStatsShow Port Total LIPs Fabric Assist LIPs Last Caused by 00 3 1 0x011001 01 1 1 0x0511ef 03 1 1 0x0511ef ...

Page 266: ...OST is skipped This reduces boot time significantly If POST has been disabled using the diagDisablePost command then fastboot is the same as reboot However fastboot skips the POST on the current reboot while diagDisablePost skips POST on all future reboots until cancelled by diagEnablePost Because fastboot reboots the CP a WARNING message and a confirmation are displayed The command only takes pla...

Page 267: ...witch admin fastboot Warning This command is being run on a control processor CP based system and will cause the active CP to reboot This will cause disruption to devices attached to both switch 0 and switch 1 To just reboot a logical switch on this system use command switchreboot 1M on the logical switch you intend to reboot Are you sure you want to reboot the active CP y n y ...

Page 268: ... not change the defined configuration which you can view using the cfgShow command until the cfgSave command is issued For the change to become effective an appropriate Fabric Assist zone configuration must be enabled using the cfgEnable command For the change to be preserved across switch reboots it must be saved to non volatile memory using the cfgSave command Note When security is enabled this ...

Page 269: ...er Specify a list of Fabric Assist Zone members The list must be enclosed in quotation marks and each member must be separated by a semicolon A member can be specified by one or more of the following methods For V3 1 x enter a fabric domain and physical port number pair For V4 1 x enter a fabric domain and area number pair View the area numbers for ports using the switchShow command WWNs Fabric As...

Page 270: ... are different Fabric Assist zones White space is ignored The Fabric Assist zone member list must have at least one member Empty lists are not allowed When a Fabric Assist zone member is specified by physical fabric port number then any and all devices connected to that port are in the Fabric Assist zone If this port is an arbitrated loop then all devices on the loop are in the Fabric Assist zone ...

Page 271: ...ice with a WWN of 10 00 00 60 69 00 00 8a either Node Name or Port Name whichever port in the fabric it is connected to Each target listed within the fazone definition shall be assigned an ALPA when the private host performs loop initialization When the private host communicates with this assigned ALPA the private loop frame shall be translated into a public format and then delivered to the target...

Page 272: ...o become effective an appropriate Fabric Assist zone configuration must be enabled using the cfgEnable command For the change to be preserved across switch reboots it must be saved to non volatile memory using the cfgSave command When security is enabled this command can only be issued from the Primary FCS switch See Security Commands on page 941 Operands The following operands are required fazone...

Page 273: ...c Assist zones using a mixture of port numbers and Fabric Assist zone aliases See Also fazoneAdd fazoneDelete fazoneRemove fazoneShow switch admin fazoneCreate fazone1 H 1 0 loop1 switch admin fazoneCreate fazone2 H 1 1 array1 1 2 array2 switch admin fazoneCreate fazone3 1 0 loop1 H 1 2 array2 ...

Page 274: ... cfgShow command until the cfgSave command is issued For the change to become effective an appropriate Fabric Assist zone configuration must be enabled using the cfgEnable command For the change to be preserved across switch reboots it must be saved to non volatile memory using the cfgSave command Note When security is enabled this command can only be issued from the Primary FCS switch See Securit...

Page 275: ...fazoneDelete 275 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Example To delete a Fabric Assist zone See Also fazoneCreate faShow faStatsShow switch admin fazoneDelete Blue_fazone ...

Page 276: ...array4 then removing array4 array3 fails but removing array3 array4 succeeds If issuing this command results in all members being removed the Fabric Assist zone is deleted Note This command does not change the defined configuration which you can view using the cfgShow command until the cfgSave command is issued For the change to become effective an appropriate Fabric Assist zone configuration must...

Page 277: ...ist of members to remove from a Fabric Assist zone The list must be enclosed in quotation marks and each member must be separated by a semicolon A member can be specified by one or more of the following methods For V3 1 x enter a fabric domain and physical port number pair For V4 1 x enter a fabric domain and area number pair View the area numbers for ports using the switchShow command WWNs Fabric...

Page 278: ...formation for both Defined and Effective configurations Defined configuration information is shown from the transaction buffer See the cfgShow command for a description of this display Note The pattern operand must be in quotation marks for V3 1 x Quotation marks are not required for V4 1 x If a parameter is specified it is used as a pattern to match fazone names and those that match in the Define...

Page 279: ...e expression This operand must be in quotation marks for V3 1 x Patterns can contain Question mark that matches any single character Asterisk that matches any string of characters Ranges which match any character within the range For example 0 9 or a f This operand is optional transflag Specify 0 to display the information from the current transaction or specify 1 to display information from the o...

Page 280: ...V4 1 x fcpprobeshow slotnumber portnumber Availability All users Release V3 1 x and V4 1 x Description Use this command to display the FCP probing information for a particular device which should be of type F FL port If the given port is not either of the above types then the following message displays port x is not an FL_Port or an F_Port fcpprobeshow ...

Page 281: ...and port number 0 through 15 The StorageWorks Core switch has a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 and 6 are control processor cards and slot 1 through 4 and 7 through 10 are port cards On each port card there are 16 ports counted from the bottom 0 to 15 portnumber Specify a port number Valid values for port number vary depending on the switch type This operand is required switch admin fcpprobeshow...

Page 282: ... x fcprlsshow slotnumber portnumber Availability All users Release V3 1 x and V4 1 x Description Use this command to display the fcp rls read link state information for a particular device which should be of type F FL port If the given port is not either of the above types then the following is displayed port x is not an FL_Port or an F_Port fcprlsshow ...

Page 283: ...h and the port number so that each port is represented by both slot number 1 through 4 or 7 through 10 and port number 0 through 15 The StorageWorks Core switch has a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 and 6 are control processor cards and slot 1 through 4 and 7 through 10 are port cards On each port card there are 16 ports counted from the bottom 0 to 15 portnumber Specify a port number Valid valu...

Page 284: ...ain identified by its domain ID is shown to be either UNKNOWN KNOWN or ERROR The revision of FDMI supported is also shown followed by the identifiers of all the HBAs at the domain and the corresponding registered port list of the HBA attributes For HBAs only the HBA identifiers and registered port lists are show No detailed HBA attributes are displayed For registered ports only its port identifier...

Page 285: ... the switch is 1 switch admin fdmicacheshow state rev KNOWN v310 HBAs 10 00 00 00 c9 25 9b 96 Total number of ports 1 Ports 10 00 00 00 c9 25 9b 96 Total count of devices on the switch is 1 switch admin fdmicacheshow Switch entry for domain 1 state rev KNOWN No devices Total count of devices on the switch is 0 Switch entry for domain 2 state rev KNOWN v410 No devices Total count of devices on the ...

Page 286: ... V4 1 x Description Use this command to display FDMI information for all HBAs and ports Detailed FDMI information are displayed for local HBAs and ports These includes HBA and port identifiers HBA registered port list and all the detailed attributes for HBA and ports Only abbreviated FDMI information are shown for HBA and ports on remote switches Operands None fdmishow ...

Page 287: ...Port Speed 0x00000001 Frame Size 0x00000800 HBA attributes Node Name 20 00 00 00 c9 25 9b 96 Manufacturer Emulex Network Systems Serial Number 0000c9259b96 Model LP9000 Model Description Emulex LightPulse LP9000 1 Gigabit PCI Fibre Channel Adapter Hardware Version 00000001 Driver Version SLI 2 SW_DATE May 3 2002 v5 2 11a2 CT_TEST 1 Firmware Version 03814101 OS Name and Version Window 2000 Max CT P...

Page 288: ...bgroup A based filtering FLTACT_LIST_B action to handle the subgroup B based filtering FLTACT_FROZEN action to handle the frame frozen process FLTACT_DISCARD action to discard frame FLTACT_FORWARD action to forward frame This command can be run on every port and send the frame in internal loop back mode The filter test requires two different ports in same quadrant due to the fact that the filter l...

Page 289: ... A B match and AL_PA match List B 10 Zone A B match and AL_PA match Frozen 11 Zone A B match and AL_PA match Discard passcnt V3 1 x only Specify the number of times to perform this test The default value is 1 passcnt passcnt V4 1 x only Specify the number of times to perform this test The default value is 1 txports list V4 1 x only Specify the user port numbers to perform this test All user ports ...

Page 290: ...ilterTest V4 1 x example See Also camTest centralMemoryTest cmemretentiontest crossporttest cmiTest itemlist portLoopbackTest portRegTest ramTest spinSilk sramRetentionTest fdefoff offset V4 1 x only Specify the program location to write filter test definition data in filter definition memory The default value is 0 The maximum offset number is set if the specified number is larger than limit switc...

Page 291: ...s stored in case the primary partition is damaged To maintain the integrity of the firmware image in the flash memory the firmwaredownload command updates both partitions at once When firmwaredownload completes successfully and the CP is rebooted the system switches the primary partition with the old firmware to the secondary and the secondary partition with the new firmware to the primary The def...

Page 292: ...ition with the old firmware to the primary and back out of the new firmware download Operands None Example To commit a new version of the firmware See Also firmwareDownload firmwarerestore switch admin firmwarecommit Doing firmwarecommit now Please wait Replicating kernel image FirmwareCommit completes successfully switch admin ...

Page 293: ...e downloads The V3 1 firmware is in the form of a single binary file This package is made available periodically to add features or to remedy defects Contact customer support to obtain information about available firmware versions This command supports both non interactive and interactive modes If no operands are specified or if there is any syntax error in the operands the command will go into th...

Page 294: ...tc and the names of packages of the firmware to be downloaded These packages are made available periodically to add features or to remedy defects Contact customer support to obtain information about available firmware versions In the StorageWorks Core switch this command by default downloads firmware image to both CPs in a rollover mode to prevent disruption to application services This operation ...

Page 295: ...s hosts This operand is required pfile V4 1 x only Specify a fully qualified path and file name for example pub dist system plist Absolute path names may be specified using forward slash Relative path names create the file in the user s home directory on UNIX hosts and in the directory where the FTP server is running on Windows hosts This operand is required passwd Specify a password This operand ...

Page 296: ...artition to the secondary partition of a CP i V4 1 x only Specify this operand to enable Incremental Install Mode By default firmwareDownload will do a full install of the whole firmware regardless of what the original firmware version was on the system In Incremental Install Upgrade Mode the names of packages in pfile are compared to what already installed on the switch and only the packages whic...

Page 297: ...Package specified in the pfile or binary file doesn t exist The RSHD V3 1 x only or FTP server is not running on host See Also fastboot reboot switchReboot version switch admin firmwaredownload Server Name or IP Address 11 22 33 44 User Name foo File Name pub dist system plist Password xxxxxx Full Install otherwise only install the difference Y Do Auto Commit after Reboot Y Reboot system after dow...

Page 298: ...at records the progress and status of the current firmwaredownload command The event log is created by the current firmwaredownload command and is kept until another firmwaredownload command is issued There is a timestamp associated with each event In a StorageWorks Core switch when firmwaredownloadstatus is run the event logs in the two CPs are synchronized The command can be run from either CP O...

Page 299: ... completed successfully on Standby CP 2 Mon Jan 24 13 32 10 2005 cp0 Standby CP reboots 3 Mon Jan 24 13 34 43 2005 cp0 Standby CP boots up 4 Mon Jan 24 13 34 45 2005 cp0 Standby CP booted up with new firmware 5 Mon Jan 24 13 37 50 2005 cp1 Active CP failed over Now this CP is becoming Active output truncated 11 Mon Jan 24 13 49 57 2005 cp1 FirmwareCommit has completed successfully on Active CP 12 ...

Page 300: ...stead want to restore the old firmware run firmwareRestore After running firmwareRestore you can run firmwareDownload again This command will reboot the system and make the old firmware active After reboot both active and backup images should be restored to the old firmware This command will only take action if the system is booted after a firmwareDownload Otherwise it will return with an error co...

Page 301: ...firmwarerestore 301 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also firmwareCommit firmwareDownload ...

Page 302: ...CP and on the remote CP This command identifies the status for each CP as Active or Standby and will also identify the slot number for each CP If there is only one CP available the command displays the Fabric OS versions for the primary and secondary partitions on that CP Operands None Example To display the firmware version of a StorageWorks 2 Gb SAN switch firmwareshow switch admin firmwareshow ...

Page 303: ... firmware version of a StorageWorks Core switch See Also firmwaredownloadstatus switch admin firmwareshow Local CP Slot 5 CP0 Active Primary partition v4 1 x Secondary Partition v4 1 x Remote CP Slot 6 CP1 Standby Primary partition v4 1 x Secondary Partition v4 1 x switch admin ...

Page 304: ... the N_Port devices and the switch F_Port and back to the main board The cables and SFPs connected should be of the same technology that is a short wavelength SFP switch port is connected to another short wavelength SFP device port using a short wavelength cable and a long wavelength port is connected to a long wavelength port and a copper port is connected to a copper port Only one frame is trans...

Page 305: ...2 0x05 3 CHALF_SQ 0x4a 0x4a 0x4a 0x4a 4 QUAD_NOT 0x00 0xff 0x00 0xff 5 CQTR_SQ 0x78 0x78 0x78 0x78 6 CRPAT 0xbc 0xbc 0x23 0x47 7 RANDOM 0x25 0x7f 0x6e 0x9a Operands This command has the following operands nframes count Specify the number of times or number of frames per port to execute this test If omitted the default value used is 10 This operand is optional ports itemlist Specify the ports to ru...

Page 306: ...DEOF ERR_STATS_BADOS ERR_STATS_C3DISC ERR_STATS_CRC ERR_STATS_ENCIN ERR_STATS_ENCOUT ERR_STATS_TRUNC ERR_STAT_2LONG ERR_STAT_BADEOF ERR_STAT_BADOS ERR_STAT_C3DISC ERR_STAT_CRC ERR_STAT_ENCIN ERR_STAT_ENCOUT ERR_STAT_TRUNC FDET_PERR FINISH_MSG_ERR FTPRT_STATUS_ERR LESSN_STATUS_ERR MBUF_STATE_ERR MBUF_STATUS_ERR NO_SEGMENT PORT_ABSENT PORT_ENABLE PORT_M2M PORT_STOPPED PORT_WRONG RXQ_FRAME_ERR RXQ_RA...

Page 307: ...ence Guide Example To run an fporttest See Also itemlist crossporttest loopporttest spinsilk porttest switch admin fporttest ports 1 0 1 15 Running fPortTest Test Complete fporttest Pass 10 of 10 Duration 0 hr 0 min 1 sec 0 0 0 127 assed switch admin ...

Page 308: ...wing fields fspfShow Table 9 Display Fields Field Description version Version of FSPF protocol domainID Domain number of local switch switchOnline State of the local switch V4 1 x only domainvalid Domain of the local switch is currently confirmed isl_ports Bit map of all E_Ports trunk_ports Bit map of all the trunk ports V4 1 x only f_ports Bit map of all the Fx_Ports V4 1 x only seg_ports Bit map...

Page 309: ...a structure agingTID Aging timer ID agingTo Aging time out value in milliseconds lsrDlyTID Link State Record delay timer ID lsrDelayTo Link State Record delay time out value in milliseconds lsrDelayCount Counter of delayed Link State Records ddb_sem FSPF semaphore ID event_sch FSPF scheduled events bit map lsrRefreshCnt Internal variable Table 9 Display Fields Continued Field Description ...

Page 310: ... switchOnline TRUE domainValid TRUE isl_ports 0 0x00000000 isl_ports 1 0x74000000 trunk_ports 0 0x00000000 f_ports 0 0x00000000 seg_ports 0 0x00000000 active_ports 0 0x00000000 minLSArrival 3 minLSInterval 5 LSoriginCount 0 startTime 50222 fspfQ 0x1003e640 fabP 0x1003e630 agingTID 0x1004ca28 agingTo 10000 lsrDlyTID 0x100507a8 lsrDelayTo 5000 lsrDelayCount 1 ddb_sem 0x1003e6e8 fabP event_sch 0x0 ls...

Page 311: ...gure alarm filtering for Fabric Watch By turning off the alarms all non environment class alarms are suppressed By turning on the alarms all class alarms are generated Note This command requires a Fabric Watch License Operands This command has the following operands fwAlarmsFilterSet alarm on off V3 1 x only mode V4 1 x only Specify 1 to enable the alarms 0 to disable the alarms If no operand is s...

Page 312: ... Watch V4 1 x example See Also fwAlarmsFilterShow switch admin fwalarmsfilterset Committing configuration done FW Alarms are disabled switch admin fwalarmsfilterset 1 Committing configuration done FW Alarms are enabled switch admin switch admin fwalarmsfilterset FW Alarms are disabled switch admin fwalarmsfilterset 1 FW Alarms are enabled switch admin ...

Page 313: ...nd V4 1 x Description Use this command to display whether alarm filtering is enabled or disabled Note This command requires a Fabric Watch License Operands None Example To display the status of alarm filtering in Fabric Watch See Also fwAlarmsFilterSet fwAlarmsFilterShow switch admin fwAlarmsFilterShow FW Alarms are enabled switch admin fwAlarmsFilterShow FW Alarms are disabled ...

Page 314: ...ommand to initialize all classes under Fabric Watch This command should only be used after installing a Fabric Watch license to enable the licensed classes Note This command requires a Fabric Watch License Operands None Example To initialize all classes under Fabric Watch fwClassInit switch admin fwClassInit fwClassInit Fabric Watch is updating fwClassInit Fabric Watch has been updated switch admi...

Page 315: ...fwClassInit 315 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also fwConfigReload fwConfigure fwShow ...

Page 316: ...cription Use this command to reload the Fabric Watch configuration This command should only be used after downloading a new Fabric Watch configuration file from a host Note This command requires a Fabric Watch License Operands None Example To reload the saved Fabric Watch configuration fwConfigReload switch admin fwConfigReload fwConfigReload Fabric Watch configuration reloaded ...

Page 317: ...fwConfigReload 317 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also configUpload configDownload fwClassInit fwConfigure fwShow ...

Page 318: ... Fabric Watch configuration Switch elements monitored by Fabric Watch are divided into classes which are further divided into areas In addition each area can include multiple thresholds Note This command requires a Fabric Watch License The Fabric Watch classes and areas are provided in the following list fwConfigure Table 10 fwConfigure Fabric Watch Classes and Areas Class Area 1 Environmental cla...

Page 319: ...9 State Changes 4 Fabric class 1 E Port downs 2 Fabric reconfigure 3 Domain ID changes 4 Segmentation changes 5 Zone changes 6 Fabric QL 7 Fabric logins 8 SFP state changes 5 E Port class 1 Link loss 2 Sync loss 3 Signal loss 4 Protocol error 5 Invalid words 6 Invalid CRCS 7 RXPerformance 8 TXPerformance 9 State Changes Table 10 fwConfigure Fabric Watch Classes and Areas Continued Class Area ...

Page 320: ...State Changes V3 1 x 7 V4 1 x 6 F FL Port Optical class 1 Link loss 2 Sync loss 3 Signal loss 4 Protocol error 5 Invalid words 6 Invalid CRCS 7 RXPerformance 8 TXPerformance 9 State Changes V3 1 x 8 V4 1 x 7 Alpa Performance Monitor class 1 Invalid CRCS V3 1 x 9 V4 1 x 8 End to End Performance Monitor class 1 Invalid CRCS 2 RXPerformance 3 TXPerformance Table 10 fwConfigure Fabric Watch Classes an...

Page 321: ...el Violations 10 SCC Violations 11 DCC Violations 12 Login Violations 13 Invalid Timestamps 14 Invalid Signatures 15 Invalid Certificates 16 SLAP Failures 17 SLAP Bad Packets 18 TS Out of Sync 19 No FCS 20 Incompatible Security DB 21 Illegal Command V3 1 x 12 V4 1 x 11 Switch Availability Monitor class 1 Total Down time 2 Total Up time 3 Duration of Occurrences 4 Fequency of Occurrences 5 MTBF Mea...

Page 322: ...erformance Monitor class 11 Security class 12 Switch Availability Monitor class 13 quit Select a class 1 13 13 1 1 Temperature 2 Fan 3 Power Supply 4 return to previous page Select an area 1 3 3 1 Index ThresholdName Status CurVal LastEvent LastEventTime LastVal LastState 1 envTemp001 enabled 32 C inBetween 23 04 42 on 10 01 2002 35 C Normal 2 envTemp002 enabled 30 C inBetween 23 04 42 on 10 01 20...

Page 323: ...sis fwFruCfg Availability Admin Release V4 1 x Description Use this command to configure FRU states and actions Based on these configuration settings Fabric Watch generates action when FRU state changes To configure e mail alerts use fwMailCfg Note This command requires a Fabric Watch License Operands None fwFruCfg ...

Page 324: ...fru status 2 change fru alarm level 6 apply fru configuration 3 change alarm frequency 7 cancel fru configuration changes 4 change fru timebase 8 return to previous page Select Id 1 8 8 1 Enter Slot Number 1 4 4 1 Absent 1 Inserted 2 Ready 4 Up 8 On 16 Off 32 Faulty 64 Enter fru alarm state 1 127 48 32 Alarm Id Label Status State Action Freq TimeBase 1 Slot 1 enable 32 17 5 Minute 2 Slot 2 enable ...

Page 325: ...x Reference Guide Displays Fabric Watch command information Synopsis fwHelp Availability All users Release V3 1 x and V4 1 x Description Use this command to display information on commands used to configure Fabric Watch Operands None fwHelp ...

Page 326: ...abric Watch fwClassInit Initialize all Fabric Watch classes fwConfigure Configure Fabric Watch fwConfigReload Reload Fabric Watch configuration fwSetToCustom Set boundary alarm level to custom fwSetToDefault Set boundary alarm level to default fwShow Show thresholds monitored by Fabric Watch fwMailCfg Email Alert by Fabric Watch fwSamShow Show Switch Availability monitored by Fabric Watch NOTE don...

Page 327: ... for the alert messages from each class Note This command requires a Fabric Watch License When configuring an e mail alert for a specific class you must specify the following information Note If the switch is rebooted using switchboot reboot or fastboot the e mail alert is set to disabled and must be re enabled again fwMailCfg Mail Server IP address Specify the IP address of the mail server Domain...

Page 328: ...s 1 SFP class 2 Port class 3 Fabric class 4 E Port class 5 F FL Port Copper class 6 F FL Port Optical class 7 Alpa Performance Monitor class 8 End to End Performance Monitor class 9 Filter Performance Monitor class 10 Security class 11 Switch Availability Monitor class SAM 12 quit Select an item 0 12 12 0 Enter Mail Server IP address 0 0 0 0 11 22 33 44 Enter Domain Name hp com hp com Mail To jonD...

Page 329: ...fwMailCfg 329 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also fwconfigure fwclassinit fwshow fwconfigreload ...

Page 330: ... All users Release V3 1 x and V4 1 x Description Use this command to displays information about port availability The information displayed includes total uptime total down time number of faulty occurrences MTBF Mean Time Before Failure and MTTF Mean Time To Failure for each port Note This command requires a Fabric Watch License Operands None fwsamshow ...

Page 331: ... Also switchshow switch admin fwsamshow Total Total Number Of Total Port Type UpTime DownTime Occurences MTBF MTTF OffTime Percent Percent Times Hours Hours Percent 0 E_PORT 89 1 1 1 0 8 1 U_PORT 0 0 0 0 0 100 2 U_PORT 0 0 0 0 0 100 3 U_PORT 0 0 0 0 0 100 4 U_PORT 0 0 0 0 0 100 5 G_PORT 0 0 0 0 0 100 6 U_PORT 0 0 0 0 0 100 7 U_PORT 0 0 0 0 0 100 switch admin ...

Page 332: ...y Admin Release V3 1 x and V4 1 x Description Use this command to set boundary and alarm levels to custom for all classes and areas for Fabric Watch Note This command requires a Fabric Watch License Operands None Example To set alarm levels to custom values See Also fwSetToDefault fwSetToCustom switch admin fwSetToCustom Committing configuration done ...

Page 333: ... Admin Release V3 1 x and V4 1 x Description Use this command to set boundary and alarm levels to default for all classes and areas for Fabric Watch Note This command requires a Fabric Watch License Operands None Example To set alarm levels to default values See Also fwSetToCustom fwSetToDefault switch admin fwSetToDefault Committing configuration done ...

Page 334: ...splayed and printed If a valid threshold name is entered as a parameter detailed information pertaining only to that threshold is displayed and printed In V4 1 x this command can display a synopsis of thresholds for a particular class or more detailed information for an individual threshold Note This command requires a Fabric Watch License The display of fwshow for Root user could be different tha...

Page 335: ... 5910 RPM envFan003 Env Fan 3 5880 RPM envFan004 Env Fan 4 5970 RPM envFan005 Env Fan 5 6060 RPM envTemp001 Env Temperature 1 33 C envTemp002 Env Temperature 2 32 C fabricDI000 Fabric Domain ID 0 DID Change s fabricED000 Fabric E port down 0 Down s fabricFL000 Fabric Fabric login 0 Login s fabricFQ000 Fabric Fabric QL 0 Change s fabricFR000 Fabric Reconfigure 0 Reconfig s output truncated ...

Page 336: ...ound 3400 RPM Buffer Size 3 Value history 3013 RPM Raw history 3013 RPM 3013 RPM 3013 RPM 3013 RPM 3013 RPM Flags 0x 40 TRIGGERED Counter Access via Function call Address 0x100187dc Argument 0x00000002 Previous 0x00000bc5 3013 Current 0x00000bc5 3013 Events Style Triggered Event 0 occurred 1 time last at 19 08 31 on 12 03 1999 Event 1 occurred 80 times last at 19 47 06 on 12 03 1999 Event 5 occurr...

Page 337: ...fwShow 337 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also fwClassInit fwConfigReload fwConfigure ...

Page 338: ...bes the GBICs capabilities interfaces manufacturer and other information Use this command with no operand to display a summary of all GBICs in the switch The summary shows the GBIC type see switchShow for an explanation of the two letter codes and for Serial ID GBIC the vendor name and GBIC serial number Use this command with the slot and portnumber operand to display detailed information about th...

Page 339: ... summary of all SFPs in the switch The summary shows the SFP type see switchshow for an explanation of the two letter codes and for Serial ID SFP the vendor name and SFP serial number Use this command with the slotnumber and portnumber operands to display detailed information about the SFP in that port Operands This command has the following operands slotnumber V4 1 x only Specify the slot number ...

Page 340: ...0 id sw Vendor AGILENT Serial No A00128928 port 1 id sw Vendor AGILENT Serial No A00128983 port 2 id sw Vendor AGILENT Serial No A00128966 port 3 id sw Vendor AGILENT Serial No A00128929 port 4 id sw Vendor AGILENT Serial No A00128988 port 5 id sw Vendor AGILENT Serial No A00127279 port 6 id sw Vendor AGILENT Serial No A00127399 port 7 id sw Vendor AGILENT Serial No A00127264 switch admin ...

Page 341: ...hat allows previously typed commands to be edited The command h displays the 20 most recent commands typed into the shell old commands fall off the top as new ones are entered To edit a command press ESC to access edit mode then use vi commands The ESC key switches the shell to edit mode The Enter key gives the line to the shell from either editing or input mode Basic vi commands h k get the previ...

Page 342: ...Commands 342 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Operands None Example To display previous shell commands See Also None switch admin h 1 version 2 switchShow 3 portDisable 2 4 portEnable 2 5 switchShow ...

Page 343: ... Availability Admin Release V4 1 x Description Use this command to disable the High Availability feature in the Switch If the HA feature is already disabled this command does nothing Operands None Example To disable the High Availability feature See Also haEnable hafailover hashow haDisable switch admin haDisable Disabling HA Done ...

Page 344: ...of Standby CP The Health of Standby CP can show one of the following values HA Synchronization Status The HA Synchronization Status field can show one of the following values hadump Healthy The Standby CP is running and the background health diagnostic has not detected any errors Failed The Standby CP is running but the background health diagnostic has discovered a problem with the blade The logs ...

Page 345: ...er haShow HA State Not In Sync The system is unable to synchronize the two CPs due to the Standby CP being faulty or another system error If a fail over were to take place at this time the Standby CP would be rebooted and the fail over will be disruptive switch admin hadump Dump HA Data Local CP Slot 5 CP0 Active Remote CP Slot 6 CP1 Standby Healthy HA enabled Heartbeat Up HA State not in sync out...

Page 346: ...vailability Admin Release V4 1 x Description Use this command to enable the High Availability HA feature in the switch If the HA feature is already enabled this command is ignored Operands None Example To enable the High Availability feature in the switch See Also haDisable haFailover haShow haEnable switch admin haEnable Enabling HA Done ...

Page 347: ...ism to occur so that the Standby CP becomes the Active CP Because haFailover results in CP reboot a warning message and a confirmation are displayed If the user answers positively then the failover takes place On a StorageWorks Core switch when HA synchronization is enabled and the CPs are in sync if a failover is initiated the port traffic light will not flash during the failover even while traff...

Page 348: ...ot in Sync Warning This command is being run on a control processor CP based system If the above status does not indicate HA State synchronized then this operation will cause the active CP to reset This will cause disruption to devices attached to both switch 0 and switch 1 and will require that existing telnet sessions be restarted To just reboot a logical switch on this system use command switch...

Page 349: ...f the following values HA Synchronization Status The HA Synchronization Status field can show one of the following values haShow Healthy The Standby CP is running and the background health diagnostic has not detected any errors Failed The Standby CP is running but the background health diagnostic has discovered a problem with the blade The logs should be checked to determine the appropriate repair...

Page 350: ...aShow HA State Not In Sync The system is unable to synchronize the two CPs due to the Standby CP being faulty or another system error If a fail over were to take place at this time the Standby CP would be rebooted and the fail over will be disruptive switch admin haShow Local CP Slot 6 CP1 Active Remote CP Slot 5 CP0 Standby HA Enabled Heartbeat Up HA State not in sync ...

Page 351: ... command to re activate the HA State Synchronizing process Operands None Example To enable the HA state synchronizing process See Also hasyncstop haFailover haShow hasyncstart switch admin hasyncstart HA State synchronization has started switch admin hashow Local CP Slot 6 CP1 Active Remote CP Slot 5 CP0 Standby Healthy HA enabled Heartbeat Up HA State synchronized switch admin ...

Page 352: ... temporarily de activate the HA Synchronization process The next fail over that takes place after may be disruptive as this command will deactivate the synchronization process Operands None Example To disable the HA state synchronizing process See Also hasyncstart haFailover haShow hasyncstop Switch admin hasyncstop Stop synchronize 0x228 fabos Switch 0 Info FSS_ME FORCELOG 4 HA State out of sync ...

Page 353: ...are additional commands that display groups of commands for example diagHelp displays a list of diagnostic commands The list shows only commands that are available to the current user this can vary according to Login user level License key Switch model To access help information for a specific command enter the command name as an operand Operands This command has the following operand help command...

Page 354: ...x Reference Guide Example The first example provides help information on the login command The second example provides help information on the configure command See Also diagHelp licenseHelp routeHelp switch admin help login switch admin help configure ...

Page 355: ...first line of each record contains the following data sets Object type CHASSIS FAN POWER SUPPLY SW BLADE switch CP BLADE control processor WWN World Wide Name or UNKNOWN Object number Slot nn for blades Unit nn for everything else Event Inserted Removed or Invalid Time of the event at Dow Mon dd hh mm ss yyyy The second and third lines of a record each contain one data set preceded by its name HP ...

Page 356: ... x 4 1 x Reference Guide Example To display the last history record See Also historyShow switch12K admin historyLastShow POWER SUPPLY Unit 2 Inserted at Tue Aug 14 15 52 10 2001 HP Part Number 60 0001536 02 HP Serial Number 1013456800 Records 11 ...

Page 357: ...est messages in the log First in mode once the log is full all additional logs are discarded so that the first set of logs to fill the buffer is preserved This command enables you to display the current history log mode and change between them It also enables you to clear the history log buffer whenever the mode is changed This command with no operand displays the current history mode value This c...

Page 358: ...abric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Example The following command sequence changes the history mode to first in from rotating See Also historyshow historyLastShow switch admin historymode rot History Mode is Rotating ...

Page 359: ...ntains the following data sets Object type CHASSIS FAN POWER SUPPLY SW BLADE switch CP BLADE control processor WWN World Wide Name or UNKNOWN Object number Slot nn for blades Unit nn for everything else Event Inserted Removed or Invalid Time of the event at Dow Mon dd hh mm ss yyyy 2 The second contains one data set HP Part Number HP Part Number xx yyyyy zz or Unknown 3 The third line contains one...

Page 360: ...er 1013456800 WWN Unit 1 Inserted at Tue Aug 14 11 03 45 2001 HP Part Number 40 0000031 03 HP Serial Number 1013456800 SW BLADE Slot 3 Removed at Tue Aug 14 12 10 09 2001 HP Part Number 60 0001532 03 HP Serial Number 1013456800 CP BLADE Slot 6 Removed at Tue Aug 14 13 45 07 2001 HP Part Number 60 0001604 02 HP Serial Number FP00X600128 SW BLADE Slot 3 Inserted at Tue Aug 14 13 53 40 2001 HP Part N...

Page 361: ... displayed per process The following table explains the fields displayed with this commands i Table 11 Command Field Description Field Description F Process Flags ALIGNWARN 001 print alignment warning messages STARTING 002 being created EXITING 004 getting shut down PTRACED 010 set if ptrace 0 has been called TRACESYS 020 tracing system calls FORKNOEXEC 040 forked but didn t exec SUPERPRIV 100 use...

Page 362: ...eduling PRI Priority number of the process Higher numbers mean lower priority NI Nice value used in priority computation ADDR Memory address of the process SZ The total size of the process in virtual memory in pages WCHAN The address of an event for which process is sleeping if blank the process is running TTY The controlling terminal of the process is printed for no controlling terminal TIME The ...

Page 363: ... x Reference Guide Example To display information about process name tSRL See Also diagHelp routeHelp switch admin i tSRL NAME ENTRY TID PRI STATUS PC SP ERRNO DELAY tSRL _nssrl_svr 11f9be20 170 PEND 1088a160 11f9c1b0 0 0 switch admin ...

Page 364: ...g mode and continues prompting other possible operating modes until one has been selected or until all the possibilities have been displayed An operating mode is confirmed with a y or yes at a prompt If an operating mode is selected different from the current mode the change is saved and the command exits Note Rebooting is required for the changes of this command to take effect Changing the link m...

Page 365: ...the CP that you are currently logged into To set the link operating mode on the active CP you must issue this command on the active CP To set the link operating mode on the standby CP you must issue this command on the standby CP During failover the link operating mode is retained separately for each CP since the physical links may be set to operate in different modes Operands This command has the...

Page 366: ...pment to which it is attached may result in an inability to communicate with the system through its ethernet interface It is recommended that you only use this command from the serial console port Are you sure you really want to do this yes y no n no y Proceed with caution Auto negotiate yes y no n no n Force 100 Mbps Full Duplex yes y no n no Force 100 Mbps Half Duplex yes y no n no Force 10 Mbps...

Page 367: ...k interfaces and not necessarily for all Ethernet network interfaces For those interfaces in which this is not supported the output for the link mode is Not applicable Operands This command has the following operand ifModeShow interface For V3 1 x specify the name of the interface The interface value must be enclosed in quotation marks The interface argument is of the form name physical unit where...

Page 368: ...ric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Example To display the link operating mode for the fei0 Ethernet interface See Also ifModeSet ifShow switch admin ifModeShow fei0 fei unit number 0 Link mode Auto negotiate switch admin ...

Page 369: ...rfaces ei or fei is the 10BaseT or 100BaseT Ethernet interface lo is the loopback interface fc is the Fibre Channel interface The fc interface is displayed for switches running IP over Fibre Channel that have been assigned an FC IP address For each interface selected the following information is displayed Flags for example loopback broadcast arp running debug Internet address Broadcast address Net...

Page 370: ...ow ifName Specify the name of an interface in quotation marks This operand is optional switch admin ifShow ei ei unit number 0 Flags 0x63 UP BROADCAST ARP RUNNING Internet address 192 168 1 65 Broadcast address 192 168 1 255 Netmask 0xffffff00 Subnetmask 0xffffff00 Ethernet address is 00 60 69 00 00 8a Metric is 0 Maximum Transfer Unit size is 1500 42962 packets received 127 packets sent 0 input e...

Page 371: ... The permanently allocated Interface Descriptor Block IDB The neighbor data structure This data structure is allocated when a switch port becomes an E_Port The neighbor data structure contains all the information relating to the switch that is connected to an adjacent switch This command displays the content of both data structures if they have been allocated Use this command without specifying a ...

Page 372: ...times this interface went down lastDownTime Last time this interface went down downReason Type of last State Change Notification that caused this interface to go down iState Current state of this interface The state can be UP or DOWN An interface in DOWN state does not have an allocated neighbor data structure and cannot be used to route traffic to other switches state Current state of this interf...

Page 373: ...ed from the neighbor switch Number includes Hellos Link State Updates LSUs and Link State Acknowledgements nInvCmd Number of invalid commands received from the neighbor switch Usually commands with an FSPF version number higher than the one running on the local switch nHloIn Number of Hello frames received from the neighbor switch nInvHlo Number of invalid Hello frames Hello frames with invalid pa...

Page 374: ... both slot number 1 through 4 or 7 through 10 and port number 0 through 15 The StorageWorks Core switch has a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 and 6 are control processor cards and slot 1 through 4 and 7 through 10 are port cards On each port card there are 16 ports counted from the bottom 0 to 15 portnumber Specify a port number Valid values for port number vary depending on the switch type This...

Page 375: ...interfaceShow 375 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also portShow switchShow ...

Page 376: ...he IOD option The IOD option is turned off by default If the IOD option was turned on using iodSet this command can be used to turn it off again Setting the IOD option to its default value will result in fast re routing after a fabric topology change This command may cause out of order delivery of frames during fabric topology changes Note This command should not be used in HP configurations Opera...

Page 377: ... Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Examples To turn off the IOD option See Also iodSet iodShow switch admin iodshow IOD is set switch admin iodreset done switch admin iodshow IOD is not set switch admin ...

Page 378: ...ink goes down traffic is rerouted around the failure When topology changes occur generally some frames are delivered out of order This command insures that frames are not delivered out of order even during fabric topology changes The default behavior is for the IOD option to be off HP configurations require that IOD be set to a 1 to ensure in order delivery of frames This command should be used wi...

Page 379: ...iodSet 379 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Examples To turn on the IOD option See Also iodReset iodShow switch admin iodSet Committing configuration done switch admin ...

Page 380: ...setting Synopsis iodShow Availability All users Release V3 1 x and V4 1 x Description Use this command to display whether the IOD option is enabled or disabled Operands None Example To display the current setting of the IOD option See Also iodSet iodReset iodShow switch admin iodShow IOD is not set switch admin ...

Page 381: ...the StorageWorks Core switch This operand is not available on the StorageWorks 2 Gb SAN switch Parameters V3 1 x For V3 1 x use this command to set the Ethernet and Fibre Channel IP and Subnetmask addresses You are also prompted to set the Gateway IP Address The option operand is not available in V3 1 x In V3 1 x you are prompted to set the following values ipAddrSet Ethernet IP Address Set the Et...

Page 382: ...ask Each CP has Ethernet IP Address Ethernet Subnetmask Host Name Gateway IP Address The default values for hostname ipaddress subnet address for CP only mask for switch only and gateway address for CPs only are sw0 hostname SW12000_1 ip 10 77 77 77 mask 255 0 0 0 sw1 hostname SW12000_2 ip 10 77 77 76 mask 255 0 0 0 cp0 hostname cp0 ip 10 77 77 75 subnet 255 0 0 0 gateway 0 0 0 0 cp1 hostname cp1 ...

Page 383: ...ly available for the StorageWorks Core switch Valid options are as follows 0 sets the Ethernet IP address Ethernet subnetmask Fibre Channel IP address and Fibre Channel subnetmask of logical switch 0 1 sets the Ethernet IP address Ethernet subnetmask Fibre Channel IP address and Fibre Channel subnetmask of logical switch 1 2 sets the Ethernet IP address Ethernet subnetmask gateway IP address and h...

Page 384: ...xample See Also ipAddrShow switch admin ipaddrset 1 Ethernet IP Address 10 77 77 77 192 168 166 148 Ethernet Subnetmask 10 77 77 76 255 255 255 0 Fibre Channel IP Address 0 0 0 0 192 168 58 135 Fibre Channel Subnetmask 0 0 0 0 192 168 166 134 Gateway IP Address 0 0 0 0 IP address being changed Committing configuration Done switch admin ...

Page 385: ...rks Core switch This operand is not available on the StorageWorks 2 Gb SAN switch Information V3 1 x This command shows the Ethernet IP Address Ethernet Subnetmask Fibre Channel IP Address Fibre Channel Subnetmask and Gateway IP address for the switch The FC IP Address shows none if the switch is not configured to run IP over Fibre Channel Note that all Fibre Channel ports on a switch have the sam...

Page 386: ...ified then the command becomes interactive The default values for hostname ipaddress subnet address for CP only mask for switch only and gateway address for CPs only are sw0 hostname SW12000_1 ip 10 77 77 77 mask 255 0 0 0 sw1 hostname SW12000_2 ip 10 77 77 76 mask 255 0 0 0 cp0 hostname cp0 ip 10 77 77 75 subnet 255 0 0 0 gateway 0 0 0 0 cp1 hostname cp1 ip 10 77 77 74 subnet 255 0 0 0 gateway 0 ...

Page 387: ...er 0 V4 1 x example See Also ipAddrSet switch admin ipAddrShow Ethernet IP Address 11 22 33 44 Ethernet Subnetmask 55 66 77 88 Fibre Channel IP Address none Fibre Channel Subnetmask none Gateway Address 12 34 56 78 switch admin switch admin ipAddrShow 0 Ethernet IP Address 11 22 33 44 Ethernet Subnetmask 55 66 77 88 Fibre Channel IP Address none Fibre Channel Subnetmask none switch admin ...

Page 388: ...status of the ISL of each port on this switch The WWN where the ISL is connected to the speed of the connection and whether this ISL is trunked are displayed Operands None Example To display the ISL connections for the switch See Also switchshow islshow switch admin islshow 1 3 5 10 00 00 60 69 20 3a a5 Cylon_13 sp 2G bw 1G 2 6 11 10 00 00 60 69 04 11 25 Cylon_22 sp 2G bw 2G 3 11 6 10 00 00 60 69 ...

Page 389: ...ription All kernel diagnostics have at least one item list parameter to specify which ports to test The normal default value for this parameter is to select everything Note This is not a command rather it is a common parameter to many commands To view the help page for this command type help itemlist If you wish to restrict the items to be tested to a smaller set the parameter value is an item lis...

Page 390: ... is a legal user port list but is not legal for any other type of list In the case of conflicting settings within a single itemlist an error will be generated as described above In the case of multiple item list parameters the last one on the command line will override any previous settings The exact type of list varies depending on the test and the parameter but the most common are Blade ports an...

Page 391: ... portloopbacktest portregtest spinsilk sramretentiontest Table 12 Object Descriptions Type Grouping Description BPORTS Blade Blade ports internal and external ports UPORTS Switch User ports ports with external connections QUADS Blade Quadrants group of normally 4 ports CHIPS Blade Chips Asics within a blade MINIS Blade Mini switches SLOTS Chassis Slots INDEX N A Anything ...

Page 392: ...lltelnet command is an interactive menu driven command Upon invocation it lists all the current telnet and serial port login sessions It lists information such as the session number login name the idle time the IP address of the connection and the time stamp of when the login session was opened A prompt is then displayed where you can specify the session number of the connection you wish to termin...

Page 393: ...ion Done You have opted to terminate the telnet session logged in as admin0 from 192 168 130 29 since 6 29pm and has been inactive for 16 00s the current command executed being rbash The device entry is pts 0 This action will effectively kill these process es USER PID ACCESS COMMAND dev pts 0 root 12868 f login root 12869 f login root 12877 f rbash Please Ensure Y N y killing session Done Collecti...

Page 394: ...mmands 394 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Note The list of open sessions displayed with killtelnet includes the user s current session Make sure you do not kill your own telnet session See Also None ...

Page 395: ...e and WWN Synopsis ledtest Availability Admin Release V4 1 x Description Use this command to run a suite of LED tests Operands None Example To test the LEDs See Also portledtest ledtest switch admin ledtest Disabling switch launch ledScript tmp script in background PID is 17974 Enter cr to ABORT ...

Page 396: ...e must be entered into the system exactly as issued If mistyped the license may be accepted but licensed products will not function After entering the license use the licenseShow command to check for correct function If no licensed products are shown then the license is invalid After entering a license the licensed product is available immediately and the system does not need to be rebooted The ex...

Page 397: ... Example To add a license key to the switch See Also licenseHelp licenseIdShow licenseRemove licenseShow portdisable portenable switchdisable switchenable license Specify a license key in quotation marks This operand is required switch admin licenseAdd bQebzbRdScRfc0iK adding license key bQebzbRdScRfc0iK done ...

Page 398: ...mmand to display a list of the commands used to administer license keys Operands None Example To display license commands Note The licenseIdShow command is available in V4 1 x only licenseHelp switch admin licenseHelp licenseAdd Add a license key to this switch licenseIdShow Show system license ID licenseRemove Remove a license key from this switch licenseShow Show current license key switch admin...

Page 399: ...licenseHelp 399 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also licenseAdd licenseIdShow licenseRemove licenseShow ...

Page 400: ...les both logical switches to use these products That is the chassis is assigned a license ID from which a license is generated Such licenses are locked and are only functional on the specific system for which they were issued This command displays to standard output the system license ID used for both generating and validating licenses on the system The license ID format is 8 pairs of hexadecimal ...

Page 401: ...Show 401 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Operands None Example To display the license ID See Also licenseAdd licenseHelp licenseRemove licenseShow switch admin licenseIdShow a4 f8 69 33 22 00 ea 18 ...

Page 402: ...n entered use the licenseShow command to verify that the key has been removed and the licensed product uninstalled After removing a license key the switch must be rebooted With no license key licenseshow displays No licenses Operands The following operand is required Example To remove a license key from the switch licenseRemove license Specify the license key in quotation marks This operand is req...

Page 403: ...licenseRemove 403 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also licenseAdd licenseHelp licenseIdShow licenseShow ...

Page 404: ...ng with a list of licensed products enabled by these keys The message No license installed on this switch is displayed when no licenses are installed Operands None Example To display the installed license keys on a switch licenseShow switch admin licenseshow beQRRcQzeQcfRSSE Web license ccySQc9yeddzTRa Zoning license Rbeebe9Re9Scffcw Fabric license R9becSccQUAcfd5 Fabric Watch license S99zcSeRdSTA...

Page 405: ...licenseShow 405 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also licenseAdd licenseHelp licenseIdShow licenseRemove ...

Page 406: ... The cost of a path is the sum of the costs of all the ISLs traversed by the path The cost of a path is also known as the metric FSPF supports load sharing over a number of equal cost paths Every ISL has a default cost that is inversely proportional to the bandwidth of the ISL For a 1Gb per second ISL the default cost is 1000 For a 2Gb per second ISL the default cost is 500 All currently active IS...

Page 407: ...ed slotnumber V4 1 x only Specify the slot number for a StorageWorks Core switch For all other switches this operand is not required The slot number must be followed by a slash and the port number so that each port is represented by both slot number 1 through 4 or 7 through 10 and port number 0 through 15 The StorageWorks Core switch has a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 and 6 are control proces...

Page 408: ...1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Examples To display the cost of a link and reset the cost See Also interfaceShow LSDbShow topologyShow uRouteShow switch admin linkcost Interface Cost 0 500 1 500 2 500 3 500 4 500 5 500 6 500 7 E_PORT 500 switch admin ...

Page 409: ...h another user name and password without first logging out from the original session If the user was originally connected using a telnet or rlogin session that session is left open This command allows you to access commands that you cannot access at your current user level Operands None Example To log in as the Admin See Also logout login switch user login login admin Password xxxxxx switch admin ...

Page 410: ...ctions return to the login prompt The command exit is accepted as synonym for logout as is a Ctrl D typed at the beginning of a line Note If you close a session by clicking the X in the upper right hand corner the window closes but the session stays open until it times out Trying to open another session before the time out has completed causes an error message to display Operands None Example To l...

Page 411: ...logout 411 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also login ...

Page 412: ...on the loop into port M s receiver This exercises all the switch components from the main board to the SFP to the fiber cable to the SFPs of the devices and the switch and back to the main board The cables and SFPs connected should be of the same technology that is a short wavelength SFP switch port should be connected to another short wavelength SFP device port using a short wavelength cable and ...

Page 413: ... pass a different data type from a palette of seven is used to generate different data pattern to create the frame The data pattern will be generated based on each data type Some data types may generate different data pattern on every pass and other data type may not change the data pattern in every pass These seven data types will be repeated every 210 pass The data palette is as follows 1 CSPAT ...

Page 414: ... each switch card there are 16 ports counted from the bottom 0 to 15 A particular port must be represented by both slot number 1 through 4 or 7 through 10 and port number 0 through 15 This operand is not required for switches that do not have slots nframes count V4 1 x only Specify the number of times or number of frames per port to execute this test The default value is 10 ports itemlist V4 1 x o...

Page 415: ...V3 1 x DIAG INIT DIAG PORTDIED DIAG XMIT DIAG TIMEOUT DIAG ERRSTAT DIAG STATS DIAG PORTWRONG For V4 1 x DATA INIT PORT_DIED EPI1_STATUS_ERR ERR_STAT ERR_STATS ERR_STATS_2LONG ERR_STATS_BADEOF switch admin loopporttest 100 8 0xaa55 2 Configuring L port 7 to CableLoopback Port done Will use pattern aa55 aa55 aa55 aa55 aa55 aa55 aa55 aa55 Running Loop Port Test passed Configuring Loopback L port s ba...

Page 416: ...RUNC ERR_STAT_2LONG ERR_STAT_BADEOF ERR_STAT_BADOS ERR_STAT_C3DISC ERR_STAT_CRC ERR_STAT_ENCIN ERR_STAT_ENCOUT ERR_STAT_TRUNC FDET_PERR FINISH_MSG_ERR FTPRT_STATUS_ERR LESSN_STATUS_ERR MBUF_STATE_ERR MBUF_STATUS_ERR NO_SEGMENT PORT_ABSENT PORT_ENABLE PORT_M2M PORT_STOPPED PORT_WRONG RXQ_FRAME_ERR RXQ_RAM_PERR STATS STATS_C3FRX STATS_FRX STATS_FTX TIMEOUT XMIT ...

Page 417: ...PortTest 417 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also camtest centralmemorytest cmemretentiontest cmitest crossporttest itemlist portloopbacktest portregtest ramtest spinsilk sramretentiontest ...

Page 418: ...h with domain number N and its neighbor switches For a link to be reported in the LSR the neighbor for that link must be in NB_ST_FULL state This command displays the content of both data structures if the LSR is present Without operands this command displays the whole Link State Database The display shows the following fields LSDbShow Table 13 LSDbShow Display Fields Field Description Domain Doma...

Page 419: ...eserved for future use type Type of the LSR Always 1 options Always 0 lsId ID of this LSR It is identical to the domain number advertiser ID domain number of the switch that originated this LSR incarn Incarnation number of this LSR length Total length in bytes of this LSR Includes header and link state information for all links chksum Checksum of total LSR with exception of lsAge field linkCnt Num...

Page 420: ...his command has the following operand cost Cost of this link The default cost for a 1 Gb s link is 1000 costCnt Always 0 type Always 1 Table 13 LSDbShow Display Fields Continued Field Description domain Specify the domain number of the LSR to be displayed This operand is optional ...

Page 421: ...ter 0x103946a0 lsrP 0x1035bb30 earlyAccLSRs 1 ignoredLSRs 0 lastIgnored Never installTime 0x4f20a 324106 lseFlags 0xa uOutIfs 0x0 uPathCost 0 uOldHopCount 1161889074 uHopsFromRoot 0 mOutIfs 0x20 parent 0x4 mPathCost 2000 mHopsFromRoot 2 Link State Record Link State Record pointer 0x1035bb30 lsAge 138 reserved 0 type 1 options 0x0 lsId 7 advertiser 7 incarn 0x80000217 length 92 chksum 0x2fdd linkCn...

Page 422: ...n for all the multicast groups or for a specific group if a group ID is supplied Normally an F_Port or FL_Port is a member of the multicast group only if it has joined the group using the Alias Server protocol On the other hand E_Ports that are part of the multicast group are selected by the multicast path selection protocol They are chosen in a way that prevents multicast routing loops The multic...

Page 423: ...lds Groups Fields Multicast Group ID Member Ports Bit map of all ports in the multicast tree for that multicast group Member ISL Ports Bit map of all E_Ports in the multicast tree for that multicast group Static ISL Ports Reserved It should be all zeroes group_ID Specify the multicast group to be displayed This operand is optional switch admin mcastShow 5 Group Member Ports Member ISL Ports Static...

Page 424: ...isplay free and used memory on the system as well as the shared memory and buffers used by the kernel By default the memory usage is displayed in bytes Operands For V3 1 x none For V4 1 x this command has the following operands By default the memory usage is displayed in bytes memshow b Specify this operand to display memory usage in bytes k Specify this operand to display memory usage in kilobyte...

Page 425: ... Example To view the memory usage in a StorageWorks Core switch See Also savecore switch admin memshow status bytes blocks avg block max block current free 22187312 19 1167753 22179008 alloc 5311888 4258 1247 cumulative alloc 314330064 5666735 55 switch admin ...

Page 426: ...ibed in the FC GS MS specification Bit 1 Platform Service Supported This bit displays the fabric capability to support the Management Server Platform Service If the service is supported you can enable it through the msplmgmtactivate command This service is described in the FC GS MS specification Bit 2 Topology Discovery Service Supported This bit displays the fabric capability to support the Manag...

Page 427: ...n Bit 7 RSCN Small Payload Supported This bit displays the fabric capability to support the RSCN Small Payload used by Name Server Bit 8 Reliable Commit Service RCS Supported The Reliable Commit Service RCS is an enhanced fabric wide commit service used by Security Zoning and Management Server To read the capability the hexadecimal value must be converted into binary The binary value is read from ...

Page 428: ...03 f0 0x0000019f switch 10 00 00 60 69 90 24 f0 0x0000019f switch123 10 00 00 60 69 90 31 f0 0x0000008f switch321 Capability Bit Definitions Bit 0 Basic Fabric Configuration Service Supported Bit 1 Platform Service Supported Bit 2 Topology Discovery Service Supported Bit 3 Unzoned Name Service Supported Bit 4 Fabric Zone Service Supported Bit 5 Fabric Lock Service Supported Bit 6 Time Service Supp...

Page 429: ...nt Server is accessible to all systems connected in band to the fabric To restrict access specify the World Wide Name WWN for one or more management applications access is then restricted to those WWNs Up to 16 maximum WWNs are supported in ACL The ACL is implemented on a per switch basis and should be configured on the switch to which the management application station is directly connected This ...

Page 430: ...rol list switch admin msConfigure 0 Done 1 Display the access list 2 Add member based on its Port Node WWN 3 Delete member based on its Port Node WWN select 0 3 1 MS Access List consists of 5 20 01 00 60 69 00 60 10 20 02 00 60 69 00 60 10 20 03 00 60 69 00 60 10 20 02 00 60 69 00 60 03 20 02 00 60 69 00 60 15 0 Done 1 Display the access list 2 Add member based on its Port Node WWN 3 Delete member...

Page 431: ...msConfigure 431 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also msCapabilityShow msPlMgmtActivate msPlMgmtDeactivate msPlatShow msPlClearDB msTdDisable msTdEnable msTdReadConfig ...

Page 432: ...ers Release V3 1 x and V4 1 x Description Use this command to display information from the Management Server Platform database The display shows the Platform name and associated attributes of each Platform object in the database Platform service is available in firmware v2 3 and above Lower level firmware releases do not support it Operands None msPlatShow ...

Page 433: ...j Platform Type 5 GATEWAY Number of Associated M A 1 Associated Management Addresses 35 http java sun com products plugin Number of Associated Node Names 1 Associated Node Names 10 00 00 60 69 20 15 71 Platform Name 10 second obj Platform Type 7 HOST_BUS_ADAPTER Number of Associated M A 1 Associated Management Addresses 30 http java sun com products 1 Number of Associated Node Names 2 Associated N...

Page 434: ... switches in the fabric Since this operation is non recoverable once issued the database will be erased it should not be used unless it is intended to resolve a database conflict between two joining fabrics or to establish an entire new fabric with an empty database Platform service is available in firmware v2 3 and above Lower level firmware releases do not support it Note When security is enable...

Page 435: ...ric See Also msPlMgmtDeactivate msPlatShow msCapabilityShow msPlMgmtActivate switch admin msplcleardb This will erase MS Platform Service Database in the entire fabric Would you like to continue this operation yes y no n no y Request to MS Platform DB Clear operation in progress Fabric wide MS Platform DB Clear operation in progress switch admin ...

Page 436: ...the fabric is not capable of handling the Platform service the msPlMgmtActivate command is rejected When this command is issued all the switches in the fabric will have the Platform service ENABLED Once activated the activation is saved to the non volatile storage of each switch so after a reboot a switch will boot up with Platform service ENABLED By default the Platform service is DISABLED Platfo...

Page 437: ...vate Platform service on all switches in the fabric V4 1 x example See Also msPlMgmtDeactivate msPlatShow msCapabilityShow msPlClearDB switch admin msplmgmtactivate Request to activate MS Platform Service in progress Completed activating MS Platform Service in the fabric switch admin ...

Page 438: ...vates the Platform service of each switch in the fabric and commits the changes to the non volatile storage of each switch Once deactivated even in the event of a reboot the switch will initialize with the Platform service DISABLED By default the Platform service is DISABLED Platform service is available in firmware v2 3 and above Lower level firmware releases do not support it Note When security ...

Page 439: ...lMgmtActivate msPlClearDB switch admin msplmgmtdeactivate MS Platform Service is currently enabled This will erase MS Platform Service configuration information as well as database in the entire fabric Would you like to continue this operation yes y no n no y Request to deactivate MS Platform Service in progress Completed deactivating MS Platform Service in the fabric switch admin ...

Page 440: ... executed on the entire fabric Once disabled even in the event of a power boundary the switch will boot up with the Topology Discovery service DISABLED Note Topology Discovery service requires the attached devices which include attached switches to support the RNID ELS command When security is enabled and using the ALL operand this command can only be issued from the Primary FCS switch See Securit...

Page 441: ... may erase all NID entries Are you sure yes y no n no y Request to disable MS Topology Discovery Service in progress MS Topology Discovery disabled locally switch admin switch admin mstddisable ALL This may erase all NID entries Are you sure yes y no n no y Request to disable MS Topology Discovery Service in progress MS Topology Discovery disabled locally MS Topology Discovery Disable Operation Co...

Page 442: ...ecuted on the entire fabric Once enabled even in the event of a reboot the switch will be boot up with the Management Server Topology Discovery service enabled Topology Discovery service requires the attached devices which include attached switches to support the RNID ELS command Note When security is enabled and using the ALL operand this command can only be issued from the Primary FCS switch See...

Page 443: ...e Also msTdDisable msTdReadConfig switch admin mstdenable Request to enable MS Topology Discovery Service in progress MS Topology Discovery enabled locally switch admin switch admin mstdenable ALL Request to enable MS Topology Discovery Service in progress MS Topology Discovery enabled locally MS Topology Discovery Enable Operation Complete switch admin ...

Page 444: ... Availability All users Release V3 1 x and V4 1 x Description Use this command to check whether or not the Management Server Topology Discovery service is enabled Operands None Example To display the status of the Topology Discovery service See Also msTdEnable msTdDisable msTDReadConfig switch admin msTdReadConfig MS Topology Discovery is Enabled switch admin ...

Page 445: ... The login session gives details of the following Which CP Switch or console serial port was used to log in The IP address of the current login session for telnet or the name of the current Console port or the Serial port if modem login used The Current CP s mode Active or Standby or Unknown The Current System Status Redundant or Non Redundant or Unknown Operands None Example To display current lo...

Page 446: ...Fabric OS Commands 446 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also version ...

Page 447: ...StatsClear slotnumber V4 1 x only Specify the slot number for a StorageWorks Core switch For all other switches this operand is not required The slot number must be followed by a slash and the port number so that each port is represented by both slot number 1 through 4 or 7 through 10 and port number 0 through 15 The StorageWorks Core switch has a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 and 6 are contro...

Page 448: ... 1 x Reference Guide When this command is specified with no operand the statistics are cleared for all interfaces Examples To display how to reset the counters on slot 1 port 4 See Also interfaceShow portShow switchShow switch admin nbrstatsclear 1 4 ...

Page 449: ...hbors to the local switch or information about a specific neighbor if a port number is supplied A neighbor is a switch that is directly attached to the local switch The display shows the following fields nbrStateShow Local Domain ID Domain number of local switch Local Port E_Port interface on local switch Domain Domain number of remote switch Remote Port E_Port interface on remote switch State Sta...

Page 450: ...ber so that each port is represented by both slot number 1 through 4 or 7 through 10 and port number 0 through 15 The StorageWorks Core switch has a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 and 6 are control processor cards and slot 1 through 4 and 7 through 10 are port cards On each port card there are 16 ports counted from the bottom 0 to 15 portnumber Specify a port number Valid values for port number...

Page 451: ...s found with wwn xxxxxxxx is displayed if there is no device matching the given WWN If matches are found the command displays the number of devices found Operands This command has the following operand Examples To display all the device PIDs matching a given WWN nodefind WWN Specify the world wide name which can be used to match the real device s port WWN or node WWN The world wide name must have ...

Page 452: ...Fabric OS Commands 452 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also nsshow nsallshow nscamshow ...

Page 453: ...aliases that the device belongs to The message There is no entry in the Local Name Server is displayed if there is no information in this switch but there still may be devices connected to other switches in the Fabric The command nsallshow shows information from all switches The display is identical to the command nsshow with the exception that an additional line is added for the aliases that the ...

Page 454: ...e 20 02 00 60 69 00 68 19 Aliases N 021200 2 3 10 00 00 60 69 00 03 19 30 00 00 60 69 00 03 19 na FC4s FCIP Fabric Port Name 20 02 00 60 69 01 44 22 Aliases N 021300 3 10 00 00 60 69 00 02 d6 20 00 00 60 69 00 02 d6 na Fabric Port Name 20 03 00 60 69 01 44 22 Aliases DeviceAlias NL 0214e2 3 21 00 00 fa ce 00 21 1e 20 00 00 fa ce 00 21 1e na FC4s FCP STOREX RS2999FCPH3 MT09 Fabric Port Name 20 04 0...

Page 455: ...nsaliasshow 455 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also nsshow nsallshow switchshow ...

Page 456: ...d Note Specifying the type operand causes the switch to send out a query to every switch in the fabric On a large fabric it is recommended not to run a script that repeatedly issues the nsAllShow command with a type operand specified Operands This command has the following operand nsAllShow type Specify the FC PH type code This operand is optional The valid values for this operand are 0 to 255 Bel...

Page 457: ...ces and all type 5 SCSI FCIP devices See Also nsShow switchShow switch admin nsAllShow 12 Nx_Ports in the Fabric 011200 0118e2 0118e4 0118e8 0118ef 021200 0214e2 0214e4 0214e8 0214ef switch admin nsAllShow 8 8 FCP Ports 0118e2 0118e4 0118e8 0118ef 0214e2 0214e4 0214e8 0214ef switch admin nsAllShow 5 2 FC IP Ports in the Fabric 011200 021200 ...

Page 458: ...or each remote switch found the output of this command shows the domain number state revision owner the list of cold and hot devices for that domain number For each device found in the cold or hot devices list the following information is displayed There may be additional lines if the device has registered any of the following information the switch automatically registers SCSI inquiry data for FC...

Page 459: ...he fabric See Also nsshow nsallshow switchshow switch admin nscamshow nscam show for remote switches Switch entry for 2 state rev owner cold v250 0xfffc01 Hot device list No Entry found Cold device list Type Pid COS PortName NodeName N 021200 2 3 10 00 00 60 69 00 ab ba 10 00 00 60 69 00 ab ba FC4s FCIP Fabric Port Name 20 02 00 60 69 00 68 19 ...

Page 460: ...connected to other switches in the fabric The following message is displayed if there is no information in this switch There is no entry in the Local Name Server There still may be devices connected to other switches in the fabric The command nsAllShow displays information from all switches Each line of output shows nsShow Indicates a cached entry from another switch Type U for unknown N for N_Por...

Page 461: ... operand Example To display local name server information TTL Time to live in seconds for cached entries or NA not applicable if the entry is local SCR V4 1 x only State change registration of the device This is displayed if r option is given r Specify this option to replace the TTL attribute output with SCR state change registration information in the display SCR is the state change registration ...

Page 462: ...Fabric OS Commands 462 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also nsAllShow switchShow ...

Page 463: ... 1 x Reference Guide Displays local Name Server statistical information Synopsis nsstatshow Availability All users Release V3 1 x and V4 1 x Description This command displays local Name Server statistical information Operands None nsstatshow ...

Page 464: ...epted 0 rejected Output 0 request 0 errors 0 unexpected 0 cached 0 timedout 0 truncated Req breakdown 0 G _ID 0 G _NN 0 GID_NN 1 GID_FT 4 GID_PT 0 GID_FF 0 GPN_FT 0 GNN_FT 0 GA_NXT 1 R _ID 0 R _NN 0 other Name Server to Server Communication Statistics Input 0 requests 48 accepts 4 rejects 0 informs 0 deletions 2 ge_id 0 ge_pn 0 ge_nn Output 52 requests 52 accepts 15 rejects 0 informs 0 deletions 0...

Page 465: ...ice Each line of output shows There may be additional lines if the device has registered any of the following information the switch automatically registers SCSI inquiry data for FCP target devices FC4s supported IP address IPA Port and node symbolic names local device only Fabric Port Name Hard address and or port IP address nszonemember Type U for unknown N for N_Port NL for NL_Port Pid 24 bit F...

Page 466: ... local zoned members Type Pid COS PortName NodeName T NL 041901 2 3 10 00 00 00 c9 26 0e ae 20 00 00 00 c9 26 0e ae n Fabric Port Name 20 09 00 60 69 50 06 78 NL 0416e2 3 22 00 00 20 37 d9 6b b3 20 00 00 20 37 d9 6b b3 n FC4s FCP SEAGATE ST318304FC 0005 Fabric Port Name 20 06 00 60 69 50 06 78 NL 0416e4 3 22 00 00 20 37 d9 61 ac 20 00 00 20 37 d9 61 ac n FC4s FCP SEAGATE ST318304FC 0005 Fabric Por...

Page 467: ...e a reboot to take effect The DRAM parity checking when enabled causes ramTest to perform several additional tests of the parity memory It also enables the parity checking hardware to verify proper parity on all DRAM read operations DRAM parity checking is only available on specific switch models If the current switch does not support parity checking an error is displayed Operands This command has...

Page 468: ...sable DRAM parity checking See Also ramTest switch admin parityCheck 1 Committing configuration done Parity check is now ON switch admin parityCheck 0 Committing configuration done Parity check is now OFF switch admin parityCheck 0 Parity not supported on system model 4 Parity check already OFF ...

Page 469: ... and User Typically all fabric management should be performed from the Admin user If the fabric is not in secure mode the behavior of the command is as follows If you are changing your own user level password you are prompted to enter the old password and if it is valid then the new password If a you are changing another user level password you are prompted to enter that user level s old password ...

Page 470: ...word of any user level will cause the login session of that account if logged in to be terminated Note If the Security option is enabled on the fabric this command is disabled on all switches except the Primary FCS See Security Commands on page 941 Refer to the HP StorageWorks Extended Fabric Version 3 1 x 4 1 x User Guide for more information The new password must fulfill these rules For V3 1 x t...

Page 471: ...the password You can also modify the name of the user login ID This operand is optional user V4 1 x only Specify the name of the user in quotation marks where you want to modify the password This operand is optional Valid values are Root Factory Admin or User You can only specify this operand when you are logged in as Root Factory or Admin If you try to change the password of a user level who is h...

Page 472: ...ccessfully switch admin user is not a valid user name You have not specified a user name that is a valid recognized user name on the system Permission denied You do not have permission to change the login name or password specified That user name is already being used V3 1 x only You cannot change the user name to that of a previously existing user Incorrect password You have not entered the corre...

Page 473: ...e contains information that may be useful to determine the cause of the system panic When executed without any arguments this command displays output from the latest panic dump file available on the switch If a panic dump file is specified as an argument the contents of that specific file are displayed Operands This command has the following operands pdshow panic dump file Specify the full path na...

Page 474: ...ls shown may be incorrect and or missing It is best if this command is run on same PLATFORM as that of pdfile _______________________ ________________________ File core_files panic core pd1038932352 SECTION PD_MISC WatchDogRegister 0x0 Section Startup time Tue Dec 3 16 06 11 UTC 2002 Kernel 2 4 19 Fabric OS v4 1 0_j_dist_1103 Made on Tue Dec 3 19 07 13 2002 Flash Tue Dec 3 13 19 06 2002 BootProm 3...

Page 475: ...d monitor installed the frame SID is the same as SourceID and frame DID is the same as DestID Both RX_COUNT and CRC_COUNT will be updated accordingly and are associated with frames received at port For frames transmitted from the port with end to end monitor installed the frame DID is the same as SourceID and frame SID is the same as DestID TX_COUNT will be updated accordingly and are associated w...

Page 476: ...rmance monitors Note This command requires an Advanced Performance Monitoring license Operands This command has the following operands slotnumber V4 1 x only Specify the slot number for a StorageWorks Core switch For all other switches this operand is not required The slot number must be followed by a slash and the port number so that each port is represented by both slot number 1 through 4 or 7 t...

Page 477: ...AddSCSIMonitor perfAddUserMonitor perfAddWriteMonitor DestID Specify the 3 byte DID Destination ID of the destination device It should be in 0xDDAAPP format where DD is Domain ID AA is Area ID and PP is AL_PA ID For example 0x058e0f has a Domain ID of 5 an Area ID of 8e and an AL_PA ID of f switch admin perfAddEEMonitor 7 2 0x058e0f 0x1182ef End to End monitor number 0 added switch admin ...

Page 478: ...count the number of IP traffic frames After a successful execution of this command a monitor number is displayed The monitor number is provided for easy manipulation of these filter based performance monitors The optional user defined alias is also displayed if one was specified All valid monitor numbers and user defined aliases can be displayed with the perfShowFilterMonitor command There is no n...

Page 479: ...ented by both slot number 1 through 4 or 7 through 10 and port number 0 through 15 The StorageWorks Core switch has a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 and 6 are control processor cards and slot 1 through 4 and 7 through 10 are port cards On each port card there are 16 ports counted from the bottom 0 to 15 portnumber Specify a port number Valid values for port number vary depending on the switch t...

Page 480: ...s in Fibre Channel frames After a successful execution of this command a monitor number is displayed The monitor number is provided for easy manipulation of these filter based performance monitors The optional user defined alias is also displayed if one was specified All valid monitor numbers and user defined aliases can be retrieved with the perfShowFilterMonitor command The maximum number of fil...

Page 481: ...rough 4 or 7 through 10 and port number 0 through 15 The StorageWorks Core switch has a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 and 6 are control processor cards and slot 1 through 4 and 7 through 10 are port cards On each port card there are 16 ports counted from the bottom 0 to 15 portnumber Specify a port number Valid values for port number vary depending on the switch type This operand is required a...

Page 482: ...ands in Fibre Channel frames After a successful execution of this command a monitor number is displayed The monitor number is provided for easy manipulation of these filter based performance monitors The optional user defined alias is also displayed if one was specified All valid monitor numbers and user defined aliases can be retrieved with the perfShowFilterMonitor command The maximum number of ...

Page 483: ... 1 through 4 or 7 through 10 and port number 0 through 15 The StorageWorks Core switch has a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 and 6 are control processor cards and slot 1 through 4 and 7 through 10 are port cards On each port card there are 16 ports counted from the bottom 0 to 15 portnumber Specify a port number Valid values for port number vary depending on the switch type This operand is requi...

Page 484: ...he number of SCSI traffic frames After a successful execution of this command a monitor number is displayed The monitor number is provided for easy manipulation of these filter based performance monitors The optional user defined alias is also displayed if one was specified All valid monitor numbers and user defined aliases can be retrieved with the perfShowFilterMonitor command There is no need t...

Page 485: ... through 4 or 7 through 10 and port number 0 through 15 The StorageWorks Core switch has a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 and 6 are control processor cards and slot 1 through 4 and 7 through 10 are port cards On each port card there are 16 ports counted from the bottom 0 to 15 portnumber Specify a port number Valid values for port number vary depending on the switch type This operand is require...

Page 486: ...ND ed together for final comparison result If the final result is logic 1 then the monitor counter will be increased by one After a successful execution of this command a monitor number is displayed The monitor number is provided for easy manipulation of these filter based performance monitors The optional user defined alias is also displayed if one was specified All valid monitor numbers and user...

Page 487: ...The slot number must be followed by a slash and the port number so that each port is represented by both slot number 1 through 4 or 7 through 10 and port number 0 through 15 The StorageWorks Core switch has a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 and 6 are control processor cards and slot 1 through 4 and 7 through 10 are port cards On each port card there are 16 ports counted from the bottom 0 to 15 p...

Page 488: ...fset must be in decimal format Valid values for Offset are 0 4 63 Offset 0 is a special case which can be used to monitor the first 4 bytes of SOFx frames EOF can not be monitored Mask Specify the mask value to be applied ANDed to frame contents ValueList Specify up to four values that need to be captured from frame contents The ValueList can be either hexadecimal or decimal format SOFx frames are...

Page 489: ...e 2 port 4 As a special case to add a filter based monitor for SOFi3 on blade 2 port 4 See Also perfAddEEMonitor perfAddIPMonitor perfAddReadMonitor perfAddRWMonitor perfAddSCSIMonitor perfAddWriteMonitor switch admin perfAddUserMonitor 2 4 4 0xff 0x22 12 0xff 0x01 User monitor 0 added switch admin switch admin perfAddUserMonitor 2 4 0 0xff 6 User monitor 1 added switch admin ...

Page 490: ...nds in Fibre Channel frames After a successful execution of this command a monitor number is displayed The monitor number is provided for easy manipulation of these filter based performance monitors The optional user defined alias is also displayed if one was specified All valid monitor numbers and user defined aliases can be retrieved with the perfShowFilterMonitor command The maximum number of f...

Page 491: ... through 4 or 7 through 10 and port number 0 through 15 The StorageWorks Core switch has a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 and 6 are control processor cards and slot 1 through 4 and 7 through 10 are port cards On each port card there are 16 ports counted from the bottom 0 to 15 portnumber Specify a port number Valid values for port number vary depending on the switch type This operand is require...

Page 492: ...ter configuration settings of performance monitoring from non volatile memory Note This command requires an Advanced Performance Monitoring license Operands None Example To clear the performance monitoring information from non volatile memory perfCfgClear switch admin perfcfgClear This will clear Performance Monitoring settings in FLASH ROM The RAM settings won t change Do you want to continue y n...

Page 493: ...perfCfgClear 493 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also perfCfgRestore perfCfgSave ...

Page 494: ...ce monitoring configuration information from non volatile memory Note This command requires an Advanced Performance Monitoring license Operands None Example To restore the performance monitoring configuration information from non volatile memory perfCfgRestore switch admin perfCfgRestore This will overwrite current Performance Monitoring settings in RAM Do you want to continue y n y Please wait Pe...

Page 495: ...perfCfgRestore 495 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also perfCfgClear perfCfgSave ...

Page 496: ...nto non volatile memory This enables the performance monitoring configuration to be saved over power off cycles Note This command requires an Advanced Performance Monitoring license Operands None Example To save the current performance monitoring configuration to firmware perfCfgSave switch admin perfCfgSave This will overwrite previously saved Performance Monitoring settings in FLASH ROM Do you w...

Page 497: ...perfCfgSave 497 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also perfCfgClear perfCfgRestore ...

Page 498: ...e this command to clear statistics counters for all or a specified End to End monitor on a port After a successful execution of this command the telnet shell will confirm that this monitor s counters have successfully been cleared Prior to issuing this command verify all the valid End to End monitor numbers on a specific port using the perfshoweemonitor command to make sure that the right monitor ...

Page 499: ...tch has a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 and 6 are control processor cards and slot 1 through 4 and 7 through 10 are port cards On each port card there are 16 ports counted from the bottom 0 to 15 portnumber Specify a port number Valid values for port number vary depending on the switch type This operand is required monitorId Specify the monitor number you want to clear Monitor numbers are defi...

Page 500: ...s command to clear statistics counters for all or a specified filter based monitor After a successful execution of this command the telnet shell will confirm that this monitor s counters have successfully been cleared Prior to issuing this command verify all the valid monitor numbers user defined aliases on a specific port using the pershowfiltermonitor command to make sure that the right monitor ...

Page 501: ...ch has a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 and 6 are control processor cards and slot 1 through 4 and 7 through 10 are port cards On each port card there are 16 ports counted from the bottom 0 to 15 portnumber Specify a port number Valid values for port number vary depending on the switch type This operand is required monitorId Specify the monitor number you want to clear Monitor numbers are defin...

Page 502: ...portnumber ALPA Availability Admin Release V3 1 x and V4 1 x Description Use this command to clear a specific AL_PA device s CRC error counter If the AL_PA is provided as an operand only the counters for that device are reset if no AL_PA is specified this command clears the CRC counters for all AL_PA devices on the specified port Note This command requires an Advanced Performance Monitoring licens...

Page 503: ... through 15 The StorageWorks Core switch has a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 and 6 are control processor cards and slot 1 through 4 and 7 through 10 are port cards On each port card there are 16 ports counted from the bottom 0 to 15 portnumber Specify a port number Valid values for port number vary depending on the switch type This operand is required ALPA Specify the AL_PA address if you want...

Page 504: ...1 x Description Use this command to delete an End to End monitor on a port After a successful execution of this command a message displays confirming that this monitor has successfully been deleted Prior to issuing this command verify all the valid end to end monitor numbers on a specific port using the perfshowfiltermonitor command to make sure that the right monitor is deleted Note This command ...

Page 505: ...Works Core switch has a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 and 6 are control processor cards and slot 1 through 4 and 7 through 10 are port cards On each port card there are 16 ports counted from the bottom 0 to 15 portnumber Specify a port number Valid values for port number vary depending on the switch type This operand is required monitorId Specify the monitor number you want to delete Monitor n...

Page 506: ...escription Use this command to delete a filter based monitor After a successful execution of this command the telnet shell confirms that this monitor has successfully been deleted Prior to issuing this command verify all the valid monitor numbers and user defined aliases on a specific port using the perfShowFilterMonitor command to make sure that the right monitor will be deleted Note This command...

Page 507: ...e switch has a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 and 6 are control processor cards and slot 1 through 4 and 7 through 10 are port cards On each port card there are 16 ports counted from the bottom 0 to 15 portnumber Specify a port number Valid values for port number vary depending on the switch type This operand is required monitorId Specify the monitor number you want to delete Monitor numbers ar...

Page 508: ...rmance monitoring help information Synopsis perfHelp Availability All users Release V3 1 x and V4 1 x Description Use this command to display the available performance monitoring help commands Note This command requires an Advanced Performance Monitoring license Operands None perfHelp ...

Page 509: ...n port perfShowEEMonitor Show user defined end to end monitors perfSetPortEEMask Set overall mask for E to E monitors perfShowPortEEMask Show the current end to end mask perfAddUserMonitor Add filter based monitor perfAddReadMonitor Add filter based monitor SCSI Read perfAddWriteMonitor Add filter based monitor SCSI Write perfAddRWMonitor Add monitor SCSI Read and Write perfAddSCSIMonitor Add moni...

Page 510: ...pairs This command can be used to match the entire SID or DID to trigger the monitor to count Fibre Channel words It can also be used to match one or two of the three fields Domain ID Area ID and AL_PA ID in SID and DID pair to trigger the monitor The EE mask is used to set up a flag on each field to control whether the field is used to trigger the monitor When a flag bit is set ff the correspondi...

Page 511: ...rt number Valid values for port number vary depending on the switch type This operand is required TxSIDMsk Specify the source ID mask in dd aa pp format where dd is Domain ID mask aa is Area ID mask and pp is AL_PA ID mask For example 00 ff 00 uses TxSID Area ID to trigger EE monitor comparison Specify the following values to turn on or off a specific field 00 Specifies that the field does not tri...

Page 512: ...Reference Guide Example To set the overall mask for end to end monitors on blade 2 port 4 See Also perfAddEEMonitor switch admin perfsetporteemask 2 4 00 00 00 ff ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 The EE mask on port 6 is set and EE counters are reset switch admin ...

Page 513: ...ay a specific AL_PA device CRC error count by the port or AL_PA If the AL_PA operand is specified only the CRC count for that AL_PA device is displayed If the AL_PA operand is not specified the CRC counts for all the AL_PA devices on a specified port are displayed CRC count is a 64 bit counter When the count is over 32 bits the CRC count value is displayed in hexadecimal Otherwise CRC count is dis...

Page 514: ...ch port is represented by both slot number 1 through 4 or 7 through 10 and port number 0 through 15 The StorageWorks Core switch has a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 and 6 are control processor cards and slot 1 through 4 and 7 through 10 are port cards On each port card there are 16 ports counted from the bottom 0 to 15 portnumber Specify a port number Valid values for port number vary dependin...

Page 515: ...isplay if no interval operand is specified Key the monitor number SID Sending ID DID Destination ID Owner_app TELNET or WEB_TOOLS Owner_ip_addr the IP address of the owner of the filter monitor Tx_count Number of FC words transmitted Rx_count Number of FC words received Crc_count Number of frames with CRC errors If you do not specify a value for the interval operand this command displays end to en...

Page 516: ... by a slash and the port number so that each port is represented by both slot number 1 through 4 or 7 through 10 and port number 0 through 15 The StorageWorks Core switch has a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 and 6 are control processor cards and slot 1 through 4 and 7 through 10 are port cards On each port card there are 16 ports counted from the bottom 0 to 15 portnumber Specify a port number ...

Page 517: ... 0 53m 4 5m 0 53m 4 5m 0 53m 4 5m 0 53m 4 5m 0 53m 0 0 52m 4 5m 0 52m 4 5m 0 52m 4 5m 0 52m 4 5m 0 52m 0 0 52m 5 0m 0 52m 5 0m 0 52m 5 0m 0 52m 5 0m 0 52m 0 0 52m 4 5m 0 52m 4 5m 0 52m 4 5m 0 52m 4 5m 0 52m 0 0 52m 4 6m 0 52m 4 6m 0 52m 4 6m 0 52m 4 6m 0 52m 0 switch admin perfshoweemonitor 4 5 There are 7 end to end monitor s defined on port 5 KEY SID DID OWNER_APP OWNER_IP_ADDR TX_COUNT RX_COUNT...

Page 518: ...Fabric OS Commands 518 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also perfAddEEMonitor ...

Page 519: ... the traffic count values This command can display if no interval operand is specified Key the monitor number Alias the monitor alias name Owner_app Telnet or Web_Tools Owner_ip_addr the IP address of the owner of the filter monitor Frame_count cumulative 64 bit frame count If you do not specify a value for the interval operand this command displays a cumulative count of the traffic detected by th...

Page 520: ...s On each port card there are 16 ports counted from the bottom 0 to 15 portnumber Specify a port number Valid values for port number vary depending on the switch type This operand is required interval Specify an interval in seconds This operand is optional switch admin perfshowfiltermonitor 2 5 6 perfShowFilterMonitor 2 5 6 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Frames CMDs CMDs Frames Frames CMDs CMDs 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 26k 1...

Page 521: ...ch admin perfshowfiltermonitor 2 5 There are 7 filter based monitors defined on port 5 KEY ALIAS OWNER_APP OWNER_IP_ADDR FRAME_COUNT 0 SCSI_Frame TELNET N A 0x00000000002c2229 1 SCSI_WR TELNET N A 0x000000000000464a 2 SCSI_RW TELNET N A 0x000000000000fd8c 3 SCSI_RW WEB_TOOLS 192 168 169 40 0x0000000000007ba3 4 SCSI_RW WEB_TOOLS 192 168 169 190 0x0000000000004f0e 5 SCSI_RD WEB_TOOLS 192 168 169 40 ...

Page 522: ...isplay the current end to end mask of a port There are only two commands that can modify the value of the EE mask perfSetPortEEMask and perfCfgRestore The end to end mask has 12 fields TxSID Domain on TxSID Area on TxSID ALPA on TxDID Domain on TxDID Area on TxDID ALPA on RxSID Domain on RxSID Area on RxSID ALPA on RxDID Domain on RxDID Area on RxDID ALPA on The fields that are marked on are used ...

Page 523: ... represented by both slot number 1 through 4 or 7 through 10 and port number 0 through 15 The StorageWorks Core switch has a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 and 6 are control processor cards and slot 1 through 4 and 7 through 10 are port cards On each port card there are 16 ports counted from the bottom 0 to 15 portnumber Specify a port number Valid values for port number vary depending on the s...

Page 524: ...Fabric OS Commands 524 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also perfAddEEMonitor perfDelEEMonitor perfShowEEMonitor perfSetPortEEMask perfShowPortEEMask ...

Page 525: ...phrase Install root certificate This command does not create the switch certificate The switch certificate should be obtained offline from Certificate Authority In secure mode this command will exit with a warning and will not create pki objects Operands None Example To create pki objects in non secure mode pkicreate switch admin pkicreate Installing Private Key and Csr Switch key pair and CSR gen...

Page 526: ...526 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide If run in secure mode the following error message is displayed See Also None switch admin pkicreate Warning Switch is in secure mode Can not create new Pki Objects Exiting ...

Page 527: ...ot certificate and switch certificate In secure mode it displays a message and does not remove pki objects Operands None Example To remove pki objects in non secure mode pkiremove switch admin pkiremove WARNING Removing Pki objects will impair the security functionality of this fibre channel switch If you want secure mode enabled you will need to get the switch certificate again About to remove Pk...

Page 528: ...28 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide If run in secure mode the following error message is displayed See Also None switch admin pkiremove This Switch is in secure mode Removing Pki objects is not allowed Exiting ...

Page 529: ... Description Use this command to display existence of pki objects i e switch private key private key passphrase CSR root certificate and switch certificate Operands None Example To view pki objects See Also None pkishow switch admin pkishow Passphrase Exist Private Key Exist CSR Exist Certificate Empty Root Certificate Exist switch admin ...

Page 530: ...try either SID or DID CAM can be shared among ports in the same quad DID used Displays the total number of CAM entries used by this port Please note that each CAM entry either SID or DID CAM can be shared among ports in the same quad SID entries Displays all existing Source ID entries within the CAM per quad Please note that each CAM entry either SID or DID CAM can be shared among ports in the sam...

Page 531: ... 7 through 10 and port number 0 through 15 The StorageWorks Core switch has a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 and 6 are control processor cards and slot 1 through 4 and 7 through 10 are port cards On each port card there are 16 ports counted from the bottom 0 to 15 portnumber Specify a port number Valid values for port number vary depending on the switch type This operand is required switch admi...

Page 532: ...play the filter CAM utilization for a single port on a switch See Also portzoneshow switchshow switch admin portcamshow 3 Area SID used DID used SID entries DID entries 3 3 4 220100 2b23e8 220800 2b23e2 220c00 2b23e0 2b23e4 Quad ports SID Free DID Free 0 3 61 508 switch admin ...

Page 533: ...g operand portcfgdefault slotnumber V4 1 x only Specify the slot number for a StorageWorks Core switch For all other switches this operand is not required The slot number must be followed by a slash and the port number so that each port is represented by both slot number 1 through 4 or 7 through 10 and port number 0 through 15 The StorageWorks Core switch has a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 an...

Page 534: ...ing example configures switch port 3 on blade 1 to factory defaults See Also portcfgeport portcfggport portcfglongdistance portcfgpersistentdisable portcfgpersistentenable portcfglport portcfgspeed portcfgshow portcfgtrunkport switch admin portcfgdefault 1 3 Committing configuration done ...

Page 535: ...e a port from becoming an E_Port The E_Port capability is enabled by default unless this command is used to disable it When a port is configured as a non E_Port through this command an ISL connected to this port will be segmented No data traffic between two switches will be routed through this port Fabric management data such as zoning information will not be exchanged through this port either The...

Page 536: ...oth slot number 1 through 4 or 7 through 10 and port number 0 through 15 The StorageWorks Core switch has a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 and 6 are control processor cards and slot 1 through 4 and 7 through 10 are port cards On each port card there are 16 ports counted from the bottom 0 to 15 portnumber Specify a port number Valid values for port number vary depending on the switch type This o...

Page 537: ...alize that port as an F_Port only and does not attempt loop initialization FL_Port on the port However if the device attached to the port initiates loop communication then the switch responds accordingly and the port can then become an FL_Port Similarly a port designated as a G_Port can become an E_Port Locking a port as a G_Port only changes the actions initiated by the switch it does not change ...

Page 538: ...resented by both slot number 1 through 4 or 7 through 10 and port number 0 through 15 The StorageWorks Core switch has a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 and 6 are control processor cards and slot 1 through 4 and 7 through 10 are port cards On each port card there are 16 ports counted from the bottom 0 to 15 portnumber Specify a port number Valid values for port number vary depending on the switc...

Page 539: ...on on the Core PID format Use the portcfgshow command to view the enabled modes on a port Operands This command has the following operands portcfgislmode slotnumber V4 1 x only Specify the slot number for a StorageWorks Core switch For all other switches this operand is not required The slot number must be followed by a slash and the port number so that each port is represented by both slot number...

Page 540: ...r port number vary depending on the switch type This operand is required 1 2 Specify 1 to enable ISL R_RDY mode Specify 0 to disable ISL R_RDY mode This operand is required switch admin portcfgislmode 3 1 Committing configuration done ISL R_RDY Mode is enabled for port 3 Please make sure the PID formats are consistent across the entire fabric switch admin switch admin portcfgislmode 3 0 Committing...

Page 541: ...s switch reboot or power cycle When this command is invoked without the optional operand you are prompted to enter the long distance level number The level value must be one of the following L0 Deconfigure the port to be a regular switch port This option supports up to 10 km links for 1 Gbps or 5 km links for 2 Gbps LE Level E mode is for E_Ports for distances beyond 5 km and up to 10 km especiall...

Page 542: ...d is persistent across switch reboot or power cycle The value of distance_level can be one of the following the numerical value representing each distance_level is shown in parentheses L0 0 Re configure the port to be a regular switch port The number of buffers reserved for the port supports up to 10km links L0 5 Level 0 5 switchshow and portcfgshow show two letter code as LM long distance up to 2...

Page 543: ...output of portshow and switchshow will print the long distance level In the portshow output the long distance level is indicated as follows L0 normal LE standard 10km L0 5 LM medium long 25km L1 long 50km L2 super long 100km LD auto In the switchshow output the long distance mode is displayed as Lx where x is the second letter in two letter distance level code described above Note Trunking is not ...

Page 544: ...t 1 through 4 and 7 through 10 are port cards On each port card there are 16 ports counted from the bottom 0 to 15 portnumber Specify a port number Valid values for port number vary depending on the switch type This operand is required distance V3 1 x only This operand indicates the distance to the connected port This operand is required The valid values for this operand are L0 Deconfigure the por...

Page 545: ...ing example is for a 50 km link on a port in a V3 1 x switch distance_level V4 1 x only This operand indicates the distance to the connected port This operand is required The valid values for this operand are L0 Re configure the port to be a regular switch port The number of buffers reserved for the port supports up to 10km links LE Level E mode is for E ports for distances beyond 5km and up to 10...

Page 546: ...2 1 done switch admin portshow 4 15 portCFlags 0x1 portFlags 0x20001 PRESENT LED portType 1 1 portState 2 Offline portPhys 4 No_Light portScn 0 portId 013f00 portWwn 20 3f 00 60 69 00 02 48 Distance super long 100km portSpeed 2Gbps Interrupts 9 Link_failure 0 Frjt 0 Unknown 0 Loss_of_sync 0 Fbsy 0 Lli 9 Loss_of_sig 9 Proc_rqrd 0 Protocol_err 0 Timed_out 0 Invalid_word 0 Rx_flushed 0 Invalid_crc 0 ...

Page 547: ...will then only attempt to initialize that port as an FL_PORT The switch never attempts point to point F_PORT initialization on the port However if the device attached to the port initiates point to point communication then the switch will respond accordingly and the port may then become an F_PORT Similarly being locked as an L_PORT will not prevent the port from becoming an E_PORT Locking a port a...

Page 548: ... switch has a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 and 6 are control processor cards and slot 1 through 4 and 7 through 10 are port cards On each port card there are 16 ports counted from the bottom 0 to 15 portnumber Specify a port number Valid values for port number vary depending on the switch type This operand is required lockmode Specify 1 to configure the specified port as a locked L_PORT Speci...

Page 549: ...e portcfgpersistentenable command to enable a port persistently A persistent enabled port re enables all previously set port configurations of that port The switch will still run the power on diagnostics and initialize a persistently disabled port A persistently disabled port can temporarily be enabled by portenable command The switchenable command will not enable the persistently disabled ports o...

Page 550: ...s that are persistently disabled Example To configure port 3 as persistently disabled See Also configure configshow configdefault portcfgdefault portcfgpersistentenable portcfgshow portshow switchshow portnumber Specify a port number Valid values for port number vary depending on the switch type This operand is required switch admin portcfgpersistentdisable 3 Committing configuration done switch a...

Page 551: ...f any other port settings A persistent port enable will re enable all previously set port configurations of that port A persistently enabled port can temporarily be disabled by portdisable or switchdisable command The switchdisable command will also disable the persistently enabled ports of that switch The persistent switch disable or enable configuration does not alter the persistent disable or e...

Page 552: ...The value of YES is displayed for ports that are persistently enabled Example To configure port 3 as persistently enabled See Also configure configshow configdefault portcfgdefault portcfgpersistentdisable portcfgshow portshow switchshow switch admin portcfgpersistentenable 3 Committing configuration done switch admin portcfgpersistentenable Ports 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Enabled YES switch admin ...

Page 553: ... Speed is displayed as 1G 2G or AN when in Auto speed Negotiation mode This value is set by the portCfgSpeed command Trunk Port is displayed as ON when port is set for trunking or blank when trunking is disabled on the port This value is set by the portCfgTrunkport command The Long Distance setting of the port is shown as blank when long distance mode is off L1 when the link is up to 50 Km or L2 w...

Page 554: ...across reboots or power cycles or when the port is allowed to function normally This mode is set by the portcfgpersistentdisable command ISL R_RDY Mode is displayed as ON when the port has been R_RDY mode enabled or blank when the port is allowed to function as an E_Port This mode is set by the portcfgislmode command Operands This command has the following operands slotnumber V4 1 x only Specify t...

Page 555: ...gEport portCfgGport portCfgLport portCfgLongDistance portCfgTrunkport portCfgSpeed switch admin portcfgshow Ports 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Speed 2G 2G 2G 2G 2G 2G 2G 2G Trunk Port ON ON ON ON ON ON Long Distance VC link init Locked L_Port Locked G_Port Disabled E_Port Persistent Disable ISL R_RDY Mode ON ON where AN AutoNegotiate OFF INVALID LM L0 5 switch admin ...

Page 556: ... a port to a particular level After this command is issued the port is disabled and enabled so that the port comes up with the new speed setting The configuration is saved in the non volatile memory and is persistent across switch reboots or power cycles If the command is specified without an operand you are prompted to enter the speed value The output of the portShow command displays the current ...

Page 557: ...umber 0 through 15 The StorageWorks Core switch has a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 and 6 are control processor cards and slot 1 through 4 and 7 through 10 are port cards On each port card there are 16 ports counted from the bottom 0 to 15 portnumber Specify a port number Valid values for port number vary depending on the switch type This operand is required speed_level Specify the speed of a ...

Page 558: ...sabled for trunking Synopsis V3 1 x portCfgTrunkport portnumber mode Synopsis V4 1 x portCfgTrunkport slotnumber portnumber mode Availability Admin Release V3 1 x and V4 1 x Description Use this command to enable or disanble a port for trunking Note This command requires a Trunking license portCfgTrunkport ...

Page 559: ...ber so that each port is represented by both slot number 1 through 4 or 7 through 10 and port number 0 through 15 The StorageWorks Core switch has a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 and 6 are control processor cards and slot 1 through 4 and 7 through 10 are port cards On each port card there are 16 ports counted from the bottom 0 to 15 portnumber Specify a port number Valid values for port number...

Page 560: ...the debug level and verbose level of port modules Operands This command has the following operands Example The following example shows how portdebug can be used to set debug level and verbose level of port modules See Also dbgshow setdbg portdebug dbg_lvl Specify the debug level to be set for port modules Valid values are 1 5 vbs_lvl Specify the verbose level to be set for port modules Valid value...

Page 561: ...this command to disable a switch port If the port is connected to another switch the fabric may reconfigure If the port is connected to one or more devices the devices can no longer communicate with the fabric If the port was online before being disabled a state transition will be indicated in the following ways RSCN SNMP trap Web pop up window The front panel LED of a disabled port flashes yellow...

Page 562: ...ot required The slot number must be followed by a slash and the port number so that each port is represented by both slot number 1 through 4 or 7 through 10 and port number 0 through 15 The StorageWorks Core switch has a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 and 6 are control processor cards and slot 1 through 4 and 7 through 10 are port cards On each port card there are 16 ports counted from the bott...

Page 563: ...on Use this command to enable a switch port If the port is connected to another switch the fabric may reconfigure If the port is connected to one or more devices the devices can communicate with the fabric For ports that come online after being enabled the following indications may be sent to indicate a state transition RSCN SNMP trap Web pop up window The front panel LED of an enabled and online ...

Page 564: ...not required The slot number must be followed by a slash and the port number so that each port is represented by both slot number 1 through 4 or 7 through 10 and port number 0 through 15 The StorageWorks Core switch has a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 and 6 are control processor cards and slot 1 through 4 and 7 through 10 are port cards On each port card there are 16 ports counted from the bot...

Page 565: ...rs in ones thousands K or millions M The following fields are displayed portErrShow frames tx Frames transmitted frames rx Frames received enc in Encoding errors inside frames crc err Frames with CRC errors too shrt Frames shorter than minimum too long Frames longer than maximum bad eof Frames with bad end of frame delimiters enc out Encoding error outside of frames disc c3 Class 3 frames discarde...

Page 566: ...ss frjt fbsy tx rx in err shrt long eof out c3 fail sync sig 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 6 61k 48 2 15 0 0 0 3k 0 0 2 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 11 ...

Page 567: ...sers Release V3 1 x and V4 1 x Description Use this command to display the following status for a port Options None portflagsshow SNMP Displays whether the port is online or offline Physical Displays the port physical status Valid values are In_Sync and No_Light Flags Displays whether there is a SFP inserted in the port whether the port is active and the port type ...

Page 568: ...U_PORT LED 4 Offline No_Light PRESENT U_PORT LED 5 Offline No_Module PRESENT U_PORT LED 6 Offline No_Module PRESENT U_PORT LED 7 Offline No_Module PRESENT U_PORT LED 8 Offline No_Module PRESENT U_PORT LED 9 Offline No_Module PRESENT U_PORT LED 10 Offline No_Module PRESENT U_PORT LED 11 Offline No_Module PRESENT U_PORT LED 12 Offline No_Module PRESENT U_PORT LED 13 Offline No_Module PRESENT U_PORT ...

Page 569: ...een once the command is executing You must disable the current switch using the switchdisable command before running this command After the command had completed the ATTN LEDs flash amber indicating the command has finished and exited You can enable the current switch using the switchenable command to set the ATTN LEDs back to black Options This command has the following operands portLEDTest npass...

Page 570: ...bric OS Commands 570 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Example To test port LEDs See Also itemlist ledtest switchdisable switchenable switch admin portledtest ports 1 1 1 5 passed switch admin ...

Page 571: ...the log displays only the activity related to that activity See portLogShow for a description of the port log If the port log is disabled the following message appears as the first line WARNING port log is disabled If the port log is disabled portLogClear enables it Certain errors automatically disable the port log to preserve information needed to understand the error new events are not collected...

Page 572: ...mple To clear the port log Errors The following errors disable the port log FCIU IUBAD FCIU IUCOUNT FCPH EXCHBAD FCPH EXCHFREE NBFSM DUPEPORTSCN UCAST RELICPDB See Also portLogDump portLogShow switch admin portLogClear switch admin portLogShow port log is empty switch admin ...

Page 573: ... 1 x and up to 8000 entries per logical switch in V4 1 x Once the log is full the newest log entries delete the oldest log entries Port logs capture switch to device device to switch switch to switch some device to device1 and control information See portLogShow for a description of the port log If the port log is disabled the following message appears as the first line see portLogClear for detail...

Page 574: ...e maximum number of lines to be displayed Only the most recent count entries are displayed This operand is optional saved Specify a nonzero value to display the saved port log from the last switch fault See uptime for conditions that cause a fault The count operand is ignored when displaying the saved log This operand is optional portid Specify the port to be displayed All other ports will not be ...

Page 575: ...portLogDump 575 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also portLogClear portLogShow uptime ...

Page 576: ...es in the switch firmware which can save up to 1024 entries per logical switch in V3 1 x and up to 8000 entries per logical switch in V4 1 x Once the log is full the newest log entries delete the oldest log entries Port logs capture switch to device device to switch switch to switch some device to device1 and control information If the port log is disabled the following message is printed as the f...

Page 577: ...d and internal decoding field port V3 1 x only Specify the port you want to display the port log for Valid input varies depending on switch type portid V4 1 x only Specify the area number of port to be displayed If a port area number is specified all other ports on the switch are ignored This operand is optional switch admin portlogdumpport 5 time task event port cmd args 16 43 35 963 PORT Rx 5 40...

Page 578: ...Fabric OS Commands 578 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also portLogClear portLogShow uptime ...

Page 579: ...play show portloginshow Type Type of login fe FLOGI Fabric Login to Fabric F_Port ff PLOGI Process Login to specific N Ports or well known address like Name Server fd FDISC Virtual N_Port login PID The port 24 bit D_ID WWN The port Worldwide Name credit The credit for this login as appropriate this is BB Buffer to Buffer Credit for FLOGIs and EE End to End Credit for PLOGIs df_sz The default frame...

Page 580: ... be followed by a slash and the port number so that each port is represented by both slot number 1 through 4 or 7 through 10 and port number 0 through 15 The StorageWorks Core switch has a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 and 6 are control processor cards and slot 1 through 4 and 7 through 10 are port cards On each port card there are 16 ports counted from the bottom 0 to 15 portnumber Specify a ...

Page 581: ... Release V3 1 x and V4 1 x Description Use this command to set or clear the debug_pdisc_flag Operands This command has the following operand Example The following example shows how to set the pdisc_flag See Also None portlogpdisc lvl Specify either 0 to clear the flag or 1 to set the pdisc_flag switch admin portlogpdisc 1 PDISC log setting 1 ...

Page 582: ...r logical switch in V3 1 x and up to 8000 entries per logical switch in V4 1 x Once the log is full the newest log entries delete the oldest log entries Port logs capture switch to device device to switch switch to switch some device to device1 and control information If the port log is disabled the following message appears as the first line See portLogClear command for more information WARNING p...

Page 583: ...hese are the first two header words and word four of the FC PH frame along with the first word of the payload and internal decoding field count Specify the maximum number of lines to display Only the most recent count entries are displayed This operand is optional saved Specify a non zero value to display the saved port log from the last switch fault See uptime for a list of conditions that cause ...

Page 584: ... debug 5 dede0001 00000f37 00000000 00000000 12 35 24 199 tReceive pstate 5 LR3 12 35 24 199 tReceive debug 5 00acedd6 00000000 00000006 00009601 12 35 24 199 tReceive debug 5 00acedd5 00000000 00000000 00009601 12 35 24 199 tReceive pstate 5 AC 12 35 24 199 tReceive debug 5 aceeee05 00000003 00000000 300082d7 12 35 25 166 tFcph debug 5 aceace55 00008601 00000000 00000000 THU OCT 17 11 26 44 2002 ...

Page 585: ...put If the port log is disabled the following message is printed as the first line see portlogclear for details WARNING port log is disabled Refer to the portlogdump command for more information on the data returned by this command Operands This command has the following operands portlogshowport count V3 1 x only Specify the maximum number of lines to display Only the most recent count entries are...

Page 586: ... zero value that specifies which port will be displayed switch admin portlogshowport 24 Feb 6 task event port cmd args 08 35 27 899 tShell pstate 14 OL1 08 35 27 899 tReceive pstate 14 LR2 08 35 27 916 tReceive pstate 14 AC 08 35 28 416 interrupt scn 14 1 08 35 28 433 tFabric ioctl 14 90 101d9910 0 08 35 28 433 tFabric Tx 14 164 02fffffd 00fffffd 0005ffff 10000000 08 35 28 433 tReceive Rx 14 0 c0f...

Page 587: ...ame port N receiver The loopback is done at the parallel loopback path The path exercised in this test does not include the media SFP nor the fiber cable Only one frame is transmitted and received at any one time No external cable is required to run this test The port LEDs flicker green rapidly while the test is running Below is the test method 1 Set all ports for parallel loopback 2 Create a fram...

Page 588: ...78 0x78 0x78 0x78 6 CRPAT 0xbc 0xbc 0x23 0x47 7 RANDOM 0x25 0x7f 0x6e 0x9a Because this test does not include the media SFP or the fiber cable in its test path use the results from this test in conjunction with the results from crossPortTest and spinSilk both of which loop frames using an external loopback cable test to determine those switch components that are not functioning properly Operands T...

Page 589: ...d to lock at 2 Gbit sec For lb_mode 0 1 the following speed modes are available to test the speed negotiation 3 set all even ports speed for auto negotiate set all odd ports speed for 1 Gbit sec 4 set all even ports speed for auto negotiate set all odd ports speed for 2 Gbit sec 5 set all odd ports speed for auto negotiate set all even ports speed for 1 Gbit sec 6 set all odd ports speed for auto ...

Page 590: ...rs Below are possible error messages if failures are detected For V3 1 x DIAG INIT DIAG PORTDIED DIAG XMIT DIAG TIMEOUT DIAG ERRSTAT DIAG STATS DIAG DATA For V4 1 x DATA ERRSTAT INIT PORTDIED STATS TIMEOUT XMIT switch admin portLoopbackTest 100 Running Port Loopback Test passed switch admin portloopbacktest ports 1 38 1 45 nframes 1 lb_mode 1 Running Port Loopback Test passed ...

Page 591: ...pbackTest 591 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also camtest centralmemorytest cmemretentiontest cmitest crossporttest filtertest portloopbacktest portregtest ramtest spinsilk sramretentiontest ...

Page 592: ...he port names of all the ports present will be displayed The port name is a string of length 32 characters or less It may consist of white spaces or printable characters excluding the characters comma and semi colon By default a port has no name until it is explicitly assigned by the user A null string that is no port name operand specified is used as the default port name when a port had no user ...

Page 593: ...as a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 and 6 are control processor cards and slot 1 through 4 and 7 through 10 are port cards On each port card there are 16 ports counted from the bottom 0 to 15 port_number V3 1 x only Specify the port number to name This operand is required portnumber V4 1 x only Specify a port number Valid values for port number vary depending on the switch type This operand is ...

Page 594: ...orts on the switch 8 or 16 columns depending on the switch model One output line is displayed per interval or second if no interval is specified until Enter Ctrl C or Ctrl D is entered Shown are the number of bytes received plus the number of bytes transmitted per interval Throughput numbers are shown as either bytes kilobytes k or megabytes m Operands This command has the following operand portPe...

Page 595: ...ghput for a StorageWorks Core switch See Also portStatsShow switch admin portperfshow 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 76m 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 76m 96 0 96 0 0 96 0 76m 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 76m 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 76m 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 76m switch admin portPerfShow 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 slot 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 slot 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ...

Page 596: ... written and read The method used is to write a walking pattern to each location The command writes 0x00000001 to register N then reads the data and compares it to make sure that the same pattern previously written is read back Then the command shifts the pattern leftward by 1 bit to 0x00000002 repeats the write read and compare cycle This continues until the last writable bit in register N is rea...

Page 597: ...00 0x0400 0x0800 0x1000 0x2000 0x4000 0x8000 Repeat the above steps until all ASIC SRAMs and registers have been tested Operands For V3 1 x none For V4 1 x this command has the following operands slot number Specify the slot number that the diagnostic will operate on The ports specified will be relative to this slot number The default is 0 ports itemlist Specify a list of blade ports to test By de...

Page 598: ...NRST skiptests mask A bit mask that defines which of the register test subtests to skip By default all subtests will be performed Valid mask values include one or more of the following Value Description 0x2 Skip retry register test 0x4 Skip statistics register test 0x8 Skip walk 1 test 0x10 Skip credit counter test verbose mode Specify a non zero value to enable verbose mode The default value is t...

Page 599: ...RegTest 599 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also camtest centralmemorytest cmemretentiontest cmitest crossporttest filtertest itemlist portloopbacktest spinsilk sramretentiontest statstest ...

Page 600: ...eShow External unicast routing table Shows unicast frame routing to another switch element in the fabric Output format is domain_number ports_bitmap where domain_number is the switch element number that a unicast frame can reach from the portnumber port ports_bitmap contains all output ports in bitmap hex format that can forward unicast frames from port number to domain number This table contains ...

Page 601: ... all output port numbers that can forward a multicast frame from the portnumber to mcast_group_id Broadcast routing table A bitmap containing all ports reachable by a received broadcast frame Bit 16 of the bitmap is always set to allow the switch element to receive broadcast frames slotnumber V4 1 x only Specify the slot number for a StorageWorks Core switch For all other switches this operand is ...

Page 602: ...so bcastShow fabricShow mcastShow switchShow topologyShow uRouteShow switch admin portRouteShow 4 15 port address ID 0x02bf00 external unicast routing table 1 0x4 vc 3 2 0x10000 vc 0 internal unicast routing table 60 0x8000 vc 2 63 0x1000 vc 5 multicast routing table 0 255 all mcast aliases 0x40 broadcast routing table 0x19040 san116 user ...

Page 603: ...command to display status information for a port Information varies with the switch model and port type The display shows portShow Table 15 PortShow Display Fields Field Description portCFlags Port control flags portFlags Bit map of port status flags portType Port type and revision numbers portState Port SNMP state Online Up and running Offline Not online portPhys gives details Testing Running dia...

Page 604: ... The port s fixed speed level or negotiated speed level 1 Gbps Fixed speed of 1 Gb per second N1 Gbps Negotiated speed of 1 Gb per second 2 Gbps Fixed speed of 2 Gb per second N2 Gbps Negotiated speed of 2 Gb per second Negotiating The speed of the port is being determined Interrupts Total number of interrupts Unknown Interrupts that are not counted elsewhere Lli Low level interface physical state...

Page 605: ... will only be displayed when there are errors CMI_bus_err Control message interface errors Table 15 PortShow Display Fields Continued Field Description slotnumber V4 1 x only Specify the slot number for a StorageWorks Core switch For all other switches this operand is not required The slot number must be followed by a slash and the port number so that each port is represented by both slot number 1...

Page 606: ...in 0 Suspended 0 Lr_out 0 Parity_err 0 Ols_in 0 2_parity_err 0 Ols_out 0 CMI_bus_err 0 switch admin switch admin portshow 15 portName portFlags 0x300082d7 portLbMod 0x10 PRESENT ACTIVE E_PORT G_PORT U_PORT SEG MENTED CBL_LB LOGIN portType 4 1 portState 1 Online portPhys 6 In_Sync portScn 7 Segmented Flow control mode 0 portRegs 0x81050000 portData 0x11efc2d0 portId 021500 portWwn 20 05 00 60 69 c0...

Page 607: ... the following operands portstatsclear slotnumber V4 1 x only Specify the slot number for a StorageWorks Core switch For all other switches this operand is not required The slot number must be followed by a slash and the port number so that each port is represented by both slot number 1 through 4 or 7 through 10 and port number 0 through 15 The StorageWorks Core switch has a total of 1 10 slots Sl...

Page 608: ...Fabric OS Commands 608 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Example To clear the hardware statistics for slot 8 port 5 See Also portstatshow switch admin portstatsclear 8 5 switch admin ...

Page 609: ...ardware statistics counters portStatsShow stat_wtx 4 byte words transmitted stat_wrx 4 byte words received stat_ftx Frames transmitted stat_frx Frames received stat_c2_frx Class 2 frames received stat_c3_frx Class 3 frames received stat_lc_rx Link control frames received stat_mc_rx Multicast frames received stat_mc_to Multicast timeouts stat_mc_tx Multicast frames transmitted tim_rdy_pri Time R_RD...

Page 610: ...EN fl_bb_stall OPN CLS BB_Credit stalls fl_cf_alloc Number of CFIFOs allocated fl_cf_opn CFIFOs delivered when OPENED fl_cf_full Number of CFIFOs full stalls fl_cf_na CFIFO not available stalls fl_trig_age Number of age count triggers fl_trig_lp Number of loop not busy triggers open Number of times the FL_Port entered OPEN state transfer Number of times the FL_Port entered TRANSFER state opened Nu...

Page 611: ... slash and the port number so that each port is represented by both slot number 1 through 4 or 7 through 10 and port number 0 through 15 The StorageWorks Core switch has a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 and 6 are control processor cards and slot 1 through 4 and 7 through 10 are port cards On each port card there are 16 ports counted from the bottom 0 to 15 portnumber Specify a port number Valid...

Page 612: ..._to 0 Multicast timeouts stat_mc_tx 0 Multicast frames transmitted tim_rdy_pri 0 Time R_RDY high priority tim_txcrd_z 0 Time BB_credit zero er_enc_in 0 Encoding errors inside of frames er_crc 0 Frames with CRC errors er_trunc 0 Frames shorter than minimum er_toolong 0 Frames longer than maximum er_bad_eof 0 Frames with bad end of frame er_enc_out 612 Encoding error outside of frames er_disc_c3 0 C...

Page 613: ...ds portswap slotnumber Specify the slot number for a StorageWorks Core switch For all other switches this operand is not required The slot number must be followed by a slash and the port number so that each port is represented by both slot number 1 through 4 or 7 through 10 and port number 0 through 15 The StorageWorks Core switch has a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 and 6 are control processor...

Page 614: ...ic OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Example The following command swaps area numbers between port 2 on slot1 with port5 on slot2 See Also switchshow portshow portenable portdisable portswapshow switch admin portswap 1 2 2 5 ...

Page 615: ...lease V4 1 x Description Use this command to disable the portswap feature The portswap command cannot be used once this feature is disabled Operands None Example The following command disables the portswap feature See Also portenable portdisable portshow portswapenable portswapshow switchshow portswapdisable switch admin portswapdisable done ...

Page 616: ...le Availability Admin Release V4 1 x Description Use this command to enable the portswap feature The portswap command cannot be used unless the feature is first enabled with this command Operands None Example The following command enables the portswap feature portswapenable switch admin portswapenable done switch admin ...

Page 617: ...portswapenable 617 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also portenable portdisable portshow portswapenable portswapshow switchshow ...

Page 618: ... x Description Use this command to displays port and area information for those ports whose area number is different from the default area number The default area number of a port is same as its switch port number Operands None Example To display information for port area IDs that have been swapped portswapshow switch admin portswapshow PortSwap is enabled No ports have been swapped switch admin ...

Page 619: ...portswapshow 619 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also errshow portenable portdisable portshow portswap portswapdisable portswapenable switchshow ...

Page 620: ...e Diagnostics can be executed every day and also on demand to troubleshoot a failure This command verifies the intended functional operation of the switch by sending frames from port M s transmitter and looping the frames back via an external fiber cable into port M s receiver thus exercising all the switch components from the main board to the GBIC to the fiber cable to the SFPs of the devices an...

Page 621: ...stopporttest command for more information Once porttest is triggered you can use stopporttest to stop the test Current progress of porttest can be viewed by running porttestshow See the porttestshow command for more information If the port type changes during porttest execution the test will continue on a given port as long as it is supported If a request is made to test all possible ports on a gi...

Page 622: ...operand is optional patsize V3 1 x only Specify the size of the pattern The default value is 2112 This operand is optional seed V3 1 x only Specify the seed value to be used with the pattern The default seed value is 0xaa This operand is optional ports itemlist V4 1 x only Specify a list of user ports to test By default all the user ports in the current slot will be assumed See itemlist help pages...

Page 623: ... size V4 1 x only Specify the size of the pattern Default size of the pattern is 1024 bytes Valid rang of values are 4 bytes through 2112 bytes seed seed V4 1 x only Specify the seed pattern to be used with pattern Default seed value is 0xaa listtype porttype V4 1 x only Specify the type of ports to run porttest The default value is 1 Valid values are 1 All ports 2 All E_ports 3 All L_ports 4 All ...

Page 624: ...x porttestshow ports itemlist Availability Admin Release V3 1 x and V4 1 x Description Use this command to retrieve a snapshot of information from porttest command Following information is displayed Pass Fail information on a given port Port type tested Current State of portTest NO TEST TESTING TEST DONE Type of ports asked to test ALL_PORTS ALL_E_PORTS ALL_L_PORTS ALL_F_PORTS porttestshow ...

Page 625: ...t Time porttest Stop Time Timeout value Error code if any Operands This command has the following operands ports V3 1 x only Specify the port to stop the test on If omitted the test will be executed on all possible ports Default value is 1 stop the test on all ports This operand is optional ports itemlist V4 1 x only Specify a list of user ports to test By default all the user ports in the current...

Page 626: ...t fporttest loopporttest portloopbacktest porttest spinfab stopporttest switch admin porttestshow 6 Port 6 PASS PortType LOOPBACK PORT PortState TESTING PortState TX PortTypeToTest ALL_PORTS Pattern 0x1 Seed 0xaa UserDelay 10 TotalIteration 100 CurrentIteration 22 TotalFail 0 ConsecutiveFail 0 StartTime Jul 1 09 03 49 StopTime NONE Timeout 0 ErrorCode 0 switch admin ...

Page 627: ...power to operate If there is less power available than the demand then the power off list is processed until there is enough power for the system to operate The format of the display varies depending on the switch model and the number of slots present When this command is executed the first item displayed is the current power off list order Then you are prompted to make any changes and finally the...

Page 628: ...3rd 7 4th 4 5th 3 6th 2 7th 1 8th 1st slot to be power off 1 10 10 7 2nd slot to be power off 1 10 9 8 3rd slot to be power off 1 10 9 4th slot to be power off 1 10 10 5th slot to be power off 1 4 4 1 6th slot to be power off 2 4 3 2 7th slot to be power off 3 4 3 8th slot to be power off 4 4 4 Old POL New POL Power Off Order 10 7 1st 9 8 2nd 8 9 3rd 7 10 4th 4 1 5th 3 2 6th 2 3 7th 1 4 8th Procee...

Page 629: ...s power available than the demand then the power off list is processed until there is enough power for the system to operate The format of the display varies depending on the switch model and the number of slots present Operands None Example To display the slot power off list order powerofflistshow switch12k admin powerofflistshow Slot 10 will be powered off 1st Slot 9 will be powered off 2nd Slot...

Page 630: ...Fabric OS Commands 630 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also chassisshow powerofflistset psshow slotpoweroff slotpoweron slotshow ...

Page 631: ... upon switch model the OEM Serial ID Data is displayed after each power supply status line The StorageWorks Core switch cannot display power supply status Power Supply status not available on this switch model The status of each supply is shown as Operands None psShow OK Power supply functioning correctly absent Power supply not present Unknown Unknown power supply unit installed Predicting Failur...

Page 632: ...pply for the current switch See Also fanShow tempShow switch admin psShow Power Supply 1 is OK DELTA DPS 1001AB 1E 23000000601 S1 IXD0111000088 Power Supply 2 is faulty DELTA DPS 1001AB 1E 23000000601 S1 IXD0111000162 Power Supply 3 is OK DELTA DPS 1001AB 1E 23000000601 S1 IXD0111000120 Power Supply 4 is absent ...

Page 633: ...umber Specify the slot number for a StorageWorks Core switch For all other switches this operand is not required The slot number must be followed by a slash and the port number so that each port is represented by both slot number 1 through 4 or 7 through 10 and port number 0 through 15 The StorageWorks Core switch has a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 and 6 are control processor cards and slot 1...

Page 634: ...00000 blm_regs 0xc9b17000 blm_proc_dir 0xc50d9f20 fab_ptr 0xc04f0000 fab_Iop 0xc04f0050 qdblm 0xc5702c00 chblm 0xc661b5a0 pt 0xc5701760 blm_miniS_handle 0xc57012e0 Bloom Local Variables blm_type 0x00000012 G_PORT E_PORTto stop blm_state 0x00000001 ONLINE p_phstate IN_SYNC blm_flags 0x00000000 NORMAL lab_mode 0x00 EFD blm_port_type Intra blade blm_rev 1 blm_initialized 0 my_domain 1 blm_quad_idx 1 ...

Page 635: ...phantomshow slotnumber portnumber Availability All users Release V4 1 x Description Use this command to display the quick loop CAM Content Addressable Memory tables Note This command is not intended for normal user operation and is available to provide supplemental information during system debug ptphantomshow ...

Page 636: ...through 10 and port number 0 through 15 The StorageWorks Core switch has a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 and 6 are control processor cards and slot 1 through 4 and 7 through 10 are port cards On each port card there are 16 ports counted from the bottom 0 to 15 portnumber Specify a port number Valid values for port number vary depending on the switch type This operand is required switch admin p...

Page 637: ...lotnumber portnumber slot all Availability All users Release V4 1 x Description Use this command to display the ASIC port properties contents for the specified port Note This command is not intended for normal user operation and is available to provide supplemental information during system debug ptpropshow ...

Page 638: ...d port number 0 through 15 The StorageWorks Core switch has a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 and 6 are control processor cards and slot 1 through 4 and 7 through 10 are port cards On each port card there are 16 ports counted from the bottom 0 to 15 portnumber Specify a port number Valid values for port number vary depending on the switch type This operand is required slot all Specify which slot...

Page 639: ...otnumber Specify the slot number for a StorageWorks Core switch For all other switches this operand is not required The slot number must be followed by a slash and the port number so that each port is represented by both slot number 1 through 4 or 7 through 10 and port number 0 through 15 The StorageWorks Core switch has a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 and 6 are control processor cards and slo...

Page 640: ...020 0xc9b1700c err_status 0003 0xc9b1700e vc_config 00c0 0xc9b17010 buf_error 00000000 0xc9b17014 mem_bufline 00080008 0xc9b17018 mem_ctl 1024 0xc9b1701a mem_offset 0000 0xc9b1701c port_ctl 0000 0xc9b1701e quad_imask c003 0xc9b17020 port_addr 00010000 0xc9b17024 lli_status 00040007 0xc9b17028 lli_ctl 00080180 0xc9b1702c lli_def 00000000 0xc9b17030 lli_mask 00020000 0xc9b17034 prescaler0 000a 0xc9b...

Page 641: ...ow slotnumber Specify the slot number for a StorageWorks Core switch For all other switches this operand is not required The slot number must be followed by a slash and the port number so that each port is represented by both slot number 1 through 4 or 7 through 10 and port number 0 through 15 The StorageWorks Core switch has a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 and 6 are control processor cards an...

Page 642: ...To display the port routing properties for slot 1 port 3 See Also ptrouteshow switch admin ptrouteshow 1 3 Port Routing table for slot 1 port 3 port address ID 0x130000 external unicast routing table internal unicast routing table multicast routing table broadcast routing table ...

Page 643: ...ds ptstatsshow slotnumber Specify the slot number for a StorageWorks Core switch For all other switches this operand is not required The slot number must be followed by a slash and the port number so that each port is represented by both slot number 1 through 4 or 7 through 10 and port number 0 through 15 The StorageWorks Core switch has a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 and 6 are control proces...

Page 644: ...istics for slot 1 port 3 Connection type BE Configured Speed 2 Interrupts 60 Link_failure 0 Unknown 2 Loss_of_sync 0 Lli 20 Loss_of_sig 0 Proc_rqrd 40 Protocol_err 0 Timed_out 0 Invalid_word 0 Rx_flushed 0 Invalid_crc 0 Tx_unavail 0 Delim_err 0 Free_buffer 0 Address_err 0 Overrun 0 Lr_in 0 Suspended 0 Lr_out 0 Parity_err 0 Ols_in 0 2_parity_err 0 Ols_out 0 CMI_bus_err 0 output truncated ...

Page 645: ...erform fabric login If QuickLoop is being run on dual switches this command disables the local switch and causes the partner switch to re initialize to a single switch QuickLoop containing only the devices connected to the partner switch Note If Advanced Zoning is in use the qlDisable qlEnable and qlPartner commands are not in effect In this case the qlPortDisable command can be used to disable in...

Page 646: ...sion 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Example The following entry disables QuickLoop mode See Also qlEnable qlPortDisable qlShow switch admin qldisable Setting switch to Fabric mode Committing configuration done Re enable FL_Ports switch admin ...

Page 647: ...ches are then combined to form a single loop using a single AL_PA space QuickLoop combines arbitrated loop and fabric topologies It consists of multiple private arbitrated loops looplets interconnected by a fabric with the existence of the fabric and the physical locations of the devices transparent All NL_Ports share a single AL_PA space and operate in accordance with FC AL QuickLoop initializati...

Page 648: ...ally re enabled using the qlPortEnable command If Advanced Zoning is in use the qlDisable qlEnable and qlPartner commands are not in effect In this case the qlPortEnable command can be used to enable individual ports This command requires an Advanced Zoning license Operands None Example The following entry enables QuickLoop mode See Also qlDisable qlPortEnable qlShow switch admin qlenable Setting ...

Page 649: ... enabled all QuickLoops defined in the configuration must resolve to one or two switch World Wide Names Zone alias names entered as members of this QuickLoop must be defined with WWNs Zone alias names that are defined by domain and port number or AL_PA are not accepted as members of the QuickLoop Note This command requires an Advanced Zoning license When security is enabled this command can only b...

Page 650: ...for a second World Wide Name to qlp1 See Also qloopCreate qloopDelete qloopRemove qloopShow qloopname Specify the name of QuickLoop in quotation marks member Specify a list of QuickLoop members in quotation marks separated by semicolons Include one or more of the following World Wide Names Zone alias names switch admin qloopAdd qlp1 wwn2 ...

Page 651: ...op_1 Blank spaces are ignored The QuickLoop member list must have one or two members an empty list is not allowed When a configuration is enabled all QuickLoops defined in the configuration must resolve to a maximum of two switch World Wide Names Zone alias names entered as members of this QuickLoop must be defined with WWNs Zone alias names that are defined by domain and port number or AL_PA are ...

Page 652: ... qloopRemove qloopShow qloopname Specify the name of QuickLoop to be created in quotation marks The qloopname cannot be used for another zone object member Specify a list of members to be added to QuickLoop in quotation marks separated by semicolons Include one or more of the following World Wide Names Zone alias names switch admin qloopCreate qlp1 10 00 00 60 69 00 60 11 switch admin qloopCreate ...

Page 653: ...rved across switch reboots it must be saved to non volatile memory using the cfgSave command For the change to become effective an appropriate zone configuration must be enabled using the cfgEnable command Note This command requires an Advanced Zoning license When security is enabled this command can only be issued from the Primary FCS switch See Security Commands on page 941 Operands The followin...

Page 654: ...Fabric OS Commands 654 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Example To delete QuickLoop qloop2 See Also qloopAdd qloopCreate qloopRemove qloopShow switch admin qloopDelete qloop2 ...

Page 655: ...oving wwn4 wwn3 fails If all members are removed the QuickLoop is deleted When a configuration is enabled all QuickLoops defined in the configuration must resolve to one or two switch World Wide Names This command changes the Defined Configuration For the change to be preserved across switch reboots it must be saved to non volatile memory using the cfgSave command For the change to become effectiv...

Page 656: ...ber wwn2 from qlp1 See Also qloopAdd qloopCreate qloopDelete qloopShow qloopName Specify the name of QuickLoop in quotation marks member Specify the list of QuickLoop members to be removed in quotation marks separated by semicolons Include one or more of the following World Wide Names Zone alias names switch admin qloopRemove qlp1 wwn2 ...

Page 657: ... a parameter is specified it is used as a pattern to match QuickLoop names those that match in the defined configuration are displayed This command changes the Defined Configuration For the change to be preserved across switch reboots it must be saved to non volatile memory using the cfgSave command For the change to become effective an appropriate zone configuration must be enabled using the cfgE...

Page 658: ...to match QuickLoop names Patterns may contain the following special characters Question mark that matches any single character Asterisk that matches any string of characters Ranges 0 9a f that match any character within the range mode Specify 1 to display the contents of RAM specify 0 to display the contents of the transaction buffer The default value is 0 switch admin qloopShow q qloop qlp1 10 00...

Page 659: ...o displays If 0 is used as argument this command sets the QuickLoop to run in single switch mode and restarts the switch if this causes a change in mode If a non zero and valid WWN a WWN that is part of the fabric for a switch is specified that switch becomes the QuickLoop partner The switch is then restarted to run in dual switch mode The partner setting is updated in non volatile memory Note If ...

Page 660: ... set another switch as a QuickLoop partner switch See Also configShow qlShow 0 wwn Specify 0 to set the QuickLoop to run on a single switch Specify a WWN to set the QuickLoop to run on dual switches This operand is optional If no operand is specified the current value is displayed switch admin qlPartner 10 00 00 60 69 10 10 ec ...

Page 661: ...initialize the QuickLoop to form a loop that excludes any devices connected to the specified port If the qlPortDisable command is entered for a port the qlEnable command has no effect on that port because it has been removed from QuickLoop management The port must be re enabled using the qlPortEnable command The specified port must be in QuickLoop mode for this command to have effect Note This com...

Page 662: ...Fabric OS Commands 662 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Example To change port 4 from QuickLoop mode to fabric mode See Also qlDisable qlPortEnable qlShow switch admin qlPortDisable 4 ...

Page 663: ... the switch that the port belongs to has a partner and the partner is running in QuickLoop mode both switches re initialize their QuickLoops to form a new loop that includes the devices connected to this port The specified port must be in fabric mode for this command to have effect Note This command requires an Advanced Zoning license Operands This command has the following operand qlPortEnable po...

Page 664: ...Fabric OS Commands 664 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Example To change port 4 from fabric mode to QuickLoop mode See Also qlEnable qlPortDisable qlShow switch admin qlPortEnable 4 ...

Page 665: ...he following information is displayed qlPortShowAll QuickLoop Mode Enabled QuickLoop mode enabled Disabled QuickLoop mode disabled Looplet state Online Completed loop initialization Lipped NL_Port lipped Lipping FL_Port lipped Initializing Loop initialization in progress Bypassed Looplet being bypassed Error Error found in this looplet Offline Looplet offline Fabric OLD_PORT state Not in QuickLoop...

Page 666: ...Operands None Example The following entry displays QuickLoop port information See Also portStatShow qlShow switch admin qlPortShowAll PortNum QuickLoop Mode Port State 0 Disabled E PORT 1 Disabled E PORT 2 Disabled E PORT 3 Disabled E PORT 4 Disabled E PORT 5 Disabled E PORT 6 Disabled E PORT 7 Disabled E PORT switch admin ...

Page 667: ...partner configured State The state of the QuickLoop Master Master switch in dual switch QuickLoop Non master Non master in dual switch QuickLoop Local Lip Looplet on local switch lipped Remote Lip Looplet on partner switch lipped Online Switch is online Offline Switch is offline Scope Dual or single indicating dual or single switch QuickLoop AL_PA bitmap The AL_PA bitmaps of devices on the QuickLo...

Page 668: ...looplet Member Current QuickLoop member ports Online Current online ports in the QuickLoop Looplet The state of each looplet The possible states are Online Lipped Lipping Initializing Bypassed Error Offline Loop initialization completed NL_Port initiated LIPs FL_Port initiated LIPs Looplet initialization in progress Looplet being bypassed Error found in this looplet Looplet offline ...

Page 669: ...lShow Self 10 00 00 60 69 20 26 2a domain 1 State Online Scope single AL_PA bitmap 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 Local AL_PAs not available Local looplet states Member 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Online Looplet 0 offline Looplet 1 offline Looplet 2 offline Looplet 3 offline Looplet 4 offline Looplet 5 offline Looplet 6 offline Looplet 7 offline switch admin ...

Page 670: ...tempted Number of QuickLoop initialization attempts QL init succeeded Number of times QuickLoop is initialized Single switch QL Number of times as single switch QuickLoop These numbers are only valid when two switches are configured to run as peers in QuickLoop Dual switch QL Number of times as dual switch QuickLoop These numbers are only valid when two switches are configured to run as peers in Q...

Page 671: ...ays QuickLoop switch statistics See Also portStatShow qlShow switch admin qlStatsShow Quick loop statistics for switch 2 Last QL init time Jan 1 00 00 00 000 QL init attempted 0 QL init succeeded 0 Single switch QL 0 Dual switch QL 0 QL enabled 0 QL disabled 0 Port started last init 0 on switch 2 switch admin ...

Page 672: ...y asynchronous events such as the fabric reconfiguring or devices logging in When quiet mode is on only output produced by shell commands is shown asynchronous output produced by other tasks is suppressed Turn quiet mode on when driving a telnet session using a script that does not expect asynchronous output Operands This command has the following operand quietMode mode Specify 0 to disable quiet ...

Page 673: ...on 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Example To display the current mode then reset to ON See Also ramTest switch admin quietMode Quiet Mode is OFF switch admin quietMode 1 Committing configuration done Quiet Mode is now ON switch admin ...

Page 674: ...ssed The method used is to write a unique pattern to each location in the SDRAMs When all are written the data is read back from each location and compared against the data previously written A failure in the test implies that the address path between the CPU and the SDRAMs is faulty resulting in failures to program unique values Following is the ramp pattern used in the test 0x57626f42 0x57626f43...

Page 675: ...operating system to operate it does not and cannot test all 16 MB of the memory Instead it tests the largest portion as given by the OS which is typically about 13 MB Operands This command has the following operand Example To run the RAM test on a switch patternSize Specify a number from 0 to 9 to determine the number of patterns used for the data subtest The default value is 0 which runs all nine...

Page 676: ...uide Errors Listed below are possible error messages if failures are detected DIAG MEMORY DIAG MEMSZ DIAG MEMNULL See Also camtest centralmemorytest cmemretentiontest crossporttest cmitest filtertest portloopbacktest portregtest spinsilk sramretentiontest statstest ...

Page 677: ...h resets then executes the normal power on booting sequence While the switch is rebooting the telnet session is closed and all Fibre Channel ports are inactive If the switch was part of a fabric the remaining switches reconfigure Note For the StorageWorks Core switch the reboot command will reboot both logical switches and both CPs A confirmation message is displayed to verify that you want to reb...

Page 678: ...in reboot Warning This command is being run on a control processor CP based system and will cause the active CP to reboot This will cause disruption to devices attached to both switch 0 and switch 1 To just reboot a logical switch on this system use command switchreboot 1M on the logical switch you intend to reboot Are you sure you want to reboot the active CP y n y ...

Page 679: ...OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Displays routing help commands Synopsis routeHelp Availability All users Release V3 1 x and V4 1 x Description Use this command to display routing help commands Operands None routeHelp ...

Page 680: ...l information interfaceShow Print FSPF interface information iodReset Turn off In Order Delivery iodSet Turn on In Order Delivery iodShow Print state of In Order Delivery linkCost Set or print the FSPF cost of a link LSDbShow Print Link State Database entry mcastShow Print multicast tree information nbrStateShow Print neighbor s summary information nbrStatsClear Reset FSPF neighbor s counters topo...

Page 681: ... while taking these parameters interactively except for p password which will not be prompted for if given in the command line Operands This command has the following operands savecore h host_name Specify a host name if FTP requires it u user_name Specify a user name for login in the above host name default will be anonymous p password Specify a password for the above user name d remote_directory ...

Page 682: ...me to core files management utility Menu 1 or R Remove all core files 2 or F FTP all core files 3 or r Remove marked files 4 or f FTP marked files 5 or m Mark Files for action 6 or u Un Mark Files for action 9 or e Exit Your choice 1 mnt core_files secd You have opted to remove ALL core files Please confirm Y N y Removing files removing core files under mnt core_files secd Done switch admin saveco...

Page 683: ...ly be issued from the Primary FCS switch See Security Commands on page 941 Operands None secfabricshow Role Displays whether the switch is the Primary FCS Backup FCS or Non FCS WWN Displays the world wide name of the switch DId Displays the Domain of the switch Status Displays the security state of the switch Ready This switch is in a stable state Busy This switch is updating its security database...

Page 684: ...mp secpolicyshow primaryfcs admin secfabricshow Role WWN DId Status Enet IP Addr Name non FCS 10 00 00 60 69 10 03 23 1 Ready 192 168 100 148 nonfcs Backup 10 00 00 60 69 00 12 53 2 Ready 192 168 100 147 backup Primary 10 00 00 60 69 22 32 83 3 Ready 192 168 100 135 primaryfcs ___________________________________________ Secured switches in the fabric 3 primaryfcs admin ...

Page 685: ...r this command is issued the current Primary FCS switch will abort its current transaction and move the Backup FCS switch where this command is issued to be the first member in the FCS list The current Primary FCS switch will then activate the new policy set and the Backup FCS switch which issued this command will become the new Primary FCS switch in the fabric The purpose of this command is to re...

Page 686: ...cshow secmodedisable secmodeenable secmodeshow switch admin secfcsfailover This switch is about to become the Primary FCS switch All transactions of the current Primary FCS switch will be aborted ARE YOU SURE yes y no n no y WARNING The FCS policy of Active and Defined Policy sets have been changed Review them before you issue secPolicyActivate again switch admin ...

Page 687: ...e Guide Displays information about security telnet commands Synopsis sechelp Availability Admin Release V3 1 x and V4 1 x Description Use this command to display a list of security telnet commands See Security Commands on page 941 Operands None sechelp ...

Page 688: ...to defined policy secPolicyActivate Activate all policy sets secPolicyAdd Add members to a policy secPolicyCreate Create a policy secPolicyDelete Delete a policy secPolicyFCSMove Move a FCS member in the FCS list secPolicyRemove Remove members from a policy secPolicySave Save all policy sets and send to switches secPolicyShow Show members of one or more policies secPolicyDump Dump all policies sec...

Page 689: ...ilability Admin Release V3 1 x and V4 1 x Description Use this command to disable security mode on all switches in the fabric This command deletes both the defined and active security database Note This command must be issued from the Primary FCS switch See Security Commands on page 941 Operands None secmodedisable ...

Page 690: ...o disable security mode See Also secfabricshow secmodeenable secmodeshow primaryfcs admin secmodedisable Warning About to disable security ARE YOU SURE yes y no n no y Committing configuration done Removing Active FMPS done Removing Defined FMPS done Disconnecting current session ...

Page 691: ...d the command becomes interactive Note sectelnet must be used to open a secure telnet session into a switch This command sets up security in the fabric by executing the following Activates security mode on all switches in the fabric Creates the security database populated with a list of FCS switches in the FCS_POLICY Distributes the security database to all switches in the fabric Resets the Root F...

Page 692: ...itch Note Make sure that all users using Fabric OS CLI or Web Tools are logged off the fabric before enabling security mode All users who are logged into the fabric on non FCS switches when this command executes have their telnet sessions terminated When security is enabled this command can only be issued from the Primary FCS switch See Security Commands on page 941 Operands This command has the f...

Page 693: ...s 10 00 00 60 69 11 fc 55 Current FCS list 10 00 00 60 69 11 fc 53 10 00 00 60 69 11 fc 55 Enter WWN Domain or switch name Leave blank when done Are you done yes y no n no y Is the FCS correct yes y no n no y New FCS switch root password Password must differ by at least 1 position New FCS switch root password Re enter new password New FCS switch factory password Re enter new password New FCS switc...

Page 694: ...Fabric OS Commands 694 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also secfabricshow secmodedisable secmodeshow ...

Page 695: ...fabric is in secure mode the following information is displayed Version stamp Displays the current version and build date and time of the security database FCS switches Displays a list of FCS switches Primary Displays whether the switch is a Primary FCS or Backup FCS WWN Displays the WWN of the FCS switch Did Displays the Domain of the FCS switch swName Displays the alias name of the FCS switch No...

Page 696: ...urrent security mode of a fabric See Also secfabricshow secmodedisable secmodeenable primaryfcs admin secmodeshow Secure Mode ENABLED Version Stamp 9182 Wed Mar 13 16 37 01 2001 POS Primary WWN DId swName 1 Yes 10 00 00 60 69 00 00 5a 21 SW47 2 No 12 00 00 60 60 03 23 5b 5 SW12 primaryfcs admin ...

Page 697: ...tches that join the fabric in the future will inherit this new password This command also disables the root and factory accounts on all non FCS switches in the fabric The password must be between 8 and 40 characters long and may consist of any combination of alpha numeric characters Note Make sure no users are logged into the network when this command is executed All users logged into the fabric a...

Page 698: ...xample To set the Admin password for all non FCS switches in the fabric See Also passwd secmodeenable secmodedisable secmodeshow sectemppasswdset primaryfcs admin secnonfcspasswd Non FCS switch password Re enter new password Committing configuration done primaryfcs admin ...

Page 699: ...to abort all changes to the defined security database that have not been saved to flash memory Note When security is enabled this command can only be issued from the Primary FCS switch See Security Commands on page 941 Operands None Example To abort all changes that have not been saved to flash memory secpolicyabort primaryfcs admin secpolicyabort Unsaved data has been aborted primaryfcs admin sec...

Page 700: ...Fabric OS Commands 700 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also secpolicyactivate secpolicyadd secpolicycreate secpolicydelete secpolicydump secpolicyremove secpolicysave secpolicyshow ...

Page 701: ...er activation the defined policy set becomes the active policy set Note When security is enabled this command can only be issued from the Primary FCS switch See Security Commands on page 941 Operands None Example To activate the defined security policy set to all switches in the fabric secpolicyactivate primaryfcs admin secpolicyactivate About to overwrite the current Active data ARE YOU SURE yes ...

Page 702: ...Fabric OS Commands 702 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also secpolicyabort secpolicyadd secpolicycreate secpolicydelete secpolicydump secpolicyremove secpolicysave secpolicyshow ...

Page 703: ... that management method When security is first enabled using the secmodeenable command only the FCS_POLICY exists Before a policy is created there is no enforcement for that management method that is all access is granted After a policy has been created and a member has been added to the policy that policy becomes closed to all access except from included members If all members are then deleted fr...

Page 704: ...ng of user defined characters These characters do not have to be capitalized like regular policy names but are case sensitive member Specify a list of member switches for the security policy The members must be enclosed in quotation marks and separated by semicolons Depending on the Policy type members can be specified using IP address WWN Domain switch name or other IP Address Member Policy Types...

Page 705: ...he device is specified with a WWN string The switch and port combination must be in the following format switch port where switch can be specified using WWN Domain or switch name port can be specified by port number separated by commas and enclosed in either brackets or parenthesis For example 2 4 6 Ports enclosed in brackets will include the devices currently attached to those ports The following...

Page 706: ...ICY See Also secpolicyabort secpolicyactivate secpolicycreate secpolicydelete secpolicydump secpolicyremove secpolicysave secpolicyshow primaryfcs admin secpolicyadd MS_POLICY 12 24 45 10 0a 67 00 40 Member s have been added to MS_POLICY primaryfcs admin primaryfcs admin secpolicyadd WSNMP_POLICY 192 168 5 21 Member s have been added to WSNMP_POLICY primaryfcs admin ...

Page 707: ... When security is first enabled using the secmodeenable command only the FCS_POLICY exists Before a policy is created there is no enforcement for that management method that is all access is granted After a policy has been created and a member has been added to the policy that policy becomes closed to all access except from included members If all members are then deleted from the policy all acces...

Page 708: ...apitalized like regular policy names Valid values for DCC_POLICY_nnn are user defined alphanumeric or underscore characters The maximum length is 30 characters including the prefix DCC_POLICY_ member Specify a list of members for the security policy The members must be enclosed in quotation marks and separated by semicolons Depending on the Policy type members can be specified using IP address WWN...

Page 709: ...ng The switch and port combination must be in the following format switch port where switch can be specified using WWN Domain or switch name port can be specified by port number separated by commas and enclosed in either brackets or parenthesis For example 2 4 6 Ports enclosed in brackets will include the devices currently attached to those ports The following examples show several ways to specify...

Page 710: ...ied as WWN strings Domains or switch names If Domain or switch names are used the switches associated must be present in the fabric or the command fails To add all switches in the current fabric as members of the SCC_POLICY enter an asterisk enclosed in quotation marks as the member value This feature cannot be used by the other security telnet commands primaryfcs admin secpolicycreate MS_POLICY 1...

Page 711: ...secpolicycreate 711 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also secpolicyabort secpolicyactivate secpolicyadd secpolicydelete secpolicydump secpolicyremove secpolicysave secpolicyshow ...

Page 712: ...members of a policy acts as an access control list for that management method When security is first enabled using the secmodeenable command only the FCS_POLICY exists Before a policy is created there is no enforcement for that management method that is all access is granted After a policy has been created and a member has been added to the policy that policy becomes closed to all access except fr...

Page 713: ...d security policy names are DCC_POLICY_nnn TELNET_POLICY HTTP_POLICY API_POLICY RSNMP_POLICY WSNMP_POLICY MS_POLICY SERIAL_POLICY FRONTPANEL_POLICY SCC_POLICY OPTIONS_POLICY The specified policy name must be capitalized The DCC_POLICY_nnn name has the common prefix DCC_POLICY_ followed by a string of user defined characters These characters do not have to be capitalized like regular policy names T...

Page 714: ...Fabric OS Commands 714 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also secpolicyabort secpolicyactivate secpolicyadd secpolicycreate secpolicydump secpolicyremove secpolicysave secpolicyshow ...

Page 715: ...ttype name Availability Admin Release V3 1 x and V4 1 x Description Use this command to display the members of an existing policy in the Active and Defined saved databases with no page breaks Note When security is enabled this command can only be issued from the Primary FCS switch See Security Commands on page 941 secpolicydump ...

Page 716: ... to specify both Active and Defined name Specify the name of a security policy you would like to view Valid values for this operand are DCC_POLICY_nnn FCS_POLICY TELNET_POLICY HTTP_POLICY API_POLICY RSNMP_POLICY WSNMP_POLICY MS_POLICY SERIAL_POLICY FRONTPANEL_POLICY SCC_POLICY OPTIONS_POLICY The specified policy name must be capitalized The DCC_POLICY_nnn name has the common prefix DCC_POLICY_ fol...

Page 717: ...Yes 10 00 00 60 69 30 15 5c 1 primaryfcs HTTP_POLICY IpAddr __________________________________________________ 192 155 52 0 ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ACTIVE POLICY SET FCS_POLICY Pos Primary WWN DId swName __________________________________________________ 1 Yes 10 00 00 60 69 30 15 5c 1 primaryfcs HTTP_POLICY IpAddr _...

Page 718: ...yfcs admin secpolicydump TELNET_POLICY ____________________________________________________ DEFINED POLICY SET TELNET_POLICY IpAddr __________________________________________________ 192 155 52 13 192 155 52 11 ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ACTIVE POLICY SET TELNET_POLICY IpAddr ____________________________________________...

Page 719: ... fabric is the Primary FCS If no parameters are specified the command becomes interactive and prompts for valid values for the operands Note This command must be issued from the Primary FCS switch If a Backup FCS is moved to the first position then it becomes the Primary FCS after activation Operands This command has the following operands If no operand is specified the command becomes interactive...

Page 720: ...s 10 00 00 60 69 10 02 18 1 switch5 2 No 10 00 00 60 69 00 00 5a 2 switch60 3 No 10 00 00 60 69 00 00 13 3 switch73 Please enter position you d like to move from 1 3 1 2 Please enter position you d like to move to 1 3 1 3 ____________________________________________________ DEFINED POLICY SET FCS_POLICY Pos Primary WWN DId swName __________________________________________________ 1 Yes 10 00 00 60...

Page 721: ...ve members from an existing security policy If a policy is empty after removing all members all accesses to the policy are disallowed the DCC_POLICY and OPTIONS_POLICY are an exception You cannot remove all members from the FCS_POLICY and you cannot remove the FCS members from the SCC_POLICY Note When security is enabled this command can only be issued from the Primary FCS switch See Security Comm...

Page 722: ...efined characters These characters do not have to be capitalized like regular policy names but are case sensitive This operand is required member Specify a member or list of members to delete from the policy The members must be enclosed in quotation marks and separated by semicolons This operand is required Depending on the policy type members can be specified using IP address WWN Domain or switch...

Page 723: ... a WWN string The switch and port combination must be in the following format switch port where switch can be specified using WWN Domain or switch name port can be specified by port number separated by commas and enclosed in either brackets or parenthesis For example 2 4 6 Ports enclosed in brackets will include the devices currently attached to those ports The following examples show several ways...

Page 724: ... a WWN of 12 24 45 10 0a 67 00 40 from MS policy See Also secpolicyabort secpolicyactivate secpolicyadd secpolicycreate secpolicydelete secpolicydump secpolicysave secpolicyshow primaryfcs admin secpolicyremove MS_POLICY 12 24 45 10 0a 67 00 40 Member s have been removed from MS_POLICY primaryfcs admin ...

Page 725: ...ption Use this command to save a defined security policy to flash memory of all switches in the fabric Note When security is enabled this command can only be issued from the Primary FCS switch See Security Commands on page 941 Operands None Example To save new policy set in all switches in the fabric secpolicysave primaryfcs admin secpolicysave Committing configuration done Saving Define FMPS done...

Page 726: ...Fabric OS Commands 726 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also secpolicyabort secpolicyactivate secpolicyadd secpolicycreate secpolicydelete secpolicydump secpolicyremove secpolicyshow ...

Page 727: ...curity policy database Users can specify which database to display If not specified all database are displayed Users can specify to view a security policy by name If no name is specified all policies are displayed This command displays the policy database one page at a time Use secpolicydump to display the policy database without page breaks Note When security is enabled this command can only be i...

Page 728: ... asterisk to specify both Active and Defined name Specify the name of a security policy you would like to view Valid values for this operand are DCC_POLICY_nnn FCS_POLICY TELNET_POLICY HTTP_POLICY API_POLICY RSNMP_POLICY WSNMP_POLICY MS_POLICY SERIAL_POLICY FRONTPANEL_POLICY SCC_POLICY OPTIONS_POLICY The specified policy name must be capitalized The DCC_POLICY_nnn name has the common prefix DCC_PO...

Page 729: ..._________________________________________________ 192 155 52 0 ____________________________________________________ primaryfcs admin primaryfcs admin secPolicyShow defined ____________________________________________________ DEFINED POLICY SET FCS_POLICY Pos Primary WWN DId swName __________________________________________________ 1 Yes 10 00 00 60 69 30 15 5c 1 primaryfcs HTTP_POLICY IpAddr _____...

Page 730: ...Fabric OS Commands 730 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also secpolicyabort secpolicyactivate secpolicyadd secpolicycreate secpolicydelete secpolicydump secpolicyremove secpolicysave ...

Page 731: ...cstatsreset name list Availability Admin Release V3 1 x and V4 1 x Description Use this command to reset statistic data for a particular policy or all policies to zero This command can be issued to any switch If issued on the Primary FCS switch this command can reset security statistics for any or all switches in the fabric secstatsreset ...

Page 732: ...SIGN INVALID_CERT SLAP FAIL SLAP_BAD_PKT TS_OUT_SYNC NO_FCS INCOMP_DB ILLEGAL_CMD The specified policy name must be all capitalized To access DCC policies enter DCC_POLICY Violations are not tracked for individual DCC policies The statistics for all DCC_POLICY violations are grouped together This operand is optional and the default is all statistics If the list operand is specified then this opera...

Page 733: ...t DCC_POLICY statistics on domains 1 and 69 See Also secfabricshow secstatsshow primaryfcs admin secstatsreset About to reset all security counters Are you sure yes y no n no y Security statistics reset to zero primaryfcs admin primaryfcs admin secstatsreset DCC_POLICY 1 69 Reset DCC_POLICY statistic primaryfcs admin ...

Page 734: ...ailability Admin Release V3 1 x and V4 1 x Description Use this command to display security statistics for one or all security policies This command can be issued to any switch If issued on the Primary FCS switch this command can retrieve and display the security statistics for any or all switches in the fabric This command can be issued to any switch secstatsshow ...

Page 735: ...N INVALID_CERT SLAP FAIL SLAP_BAD_PKT TS_OUT_SYNC NO_FCS INCOMP_DB ILLEGAL_CMD The specified policy name must be all capitalized To access DCC policies enter DCC_POLICY Violations are not tracked for individual DCC policies The statistics for all DCC_POLICY violations are grouped together This operand is optional and the default is all statistics If the list operand is specified then this operand ...

Page 736: ...n for the TELNET_POLICY for all switches in the fabric See Also secfabricshow secstatsreset primaryfcs admin secstatsshow MS_POLICY Name Value MS 20 primaryfcs admin primaryfcs admin secstatsshow TELNET_POLICY Fabric Statistics Domain 1 Name Value TELNET_POLICY 0 Domain 69 Name Value TELNET_POLICY 0 Domain 70 Name Value TELNET_POLICY 0 primaryfcs admin ...

Page 737: ...ame is not supplied all passwords on the switch identified by the specified Domain are refreshed If the Domain is also not supplied all temporary passwords for all login levels are removed from every switch in the fabric Each switch has four accounts Root Factory Admin and User Root and Factory accounts are disabled for non FCS switches If they are temporarily activated by sectemppasswdset those a...

Page 738: ... is optional primaryfcs admin sectemppasswdreset 2 root Account root has been successfully disabled on domain 2 primaryfcs admin sectemppasswdreset 2 Restoring password of every account on domain 2 Temporary password of each account on domain 2 has been successfully reset if switch is non fcs switch it will further display Root and factory accounts on domain 2 have been disabled primaryfcs admin s...

Page 739: ...into the primary FCS switch you must enter the password of the same level account on the primary FCS switch The password setup on the target is not persistent and will be reset to the secure fabric wide setting when this target switch is rebooted or when sectemppasswdreset is run on primary FCS switch Each switch has four accounts Root Factory Admin and User Root and Factory accounts are disabled ...

Page 740: ...wd sectemppasswdreset domain Specify the Domain of a switch where you want to change the password This operand is required login_name Specify the login name where you want to change the password This operand is required primaryfcs admin sectemppasswdset 2 root Please provide password of root on primary FCS switch in order to change this password Set remote switch root password Re enter new passwor...

Page 741: ...r from management application problems This command will abort all current changes that have not been committed or activated Note This command can be issued from any switch in the fabric When security is enabled this command can only be issued from the Primary FCS switch See Security Commands on page 941 Operands None Example To abort the current security transaction sectransabort primaryfcs admin...

Page 742: ... OS Commands 742 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also secpolicyabort secpolicyactivate secpolicyadd secpolicycreate secpolicydelete secpolicydump secpolicyremove secpolicysave secpolicyshow ...

Page 743: ... the secpolicyadd secpolicyremove and secpolicyactivate commands to modify the FCS_POLICY of the merging fabrics to match the FCS_POLICY of the controller fabric All secure fabrics to be merged must have identical FCS_POLICY lists The FCS policies of merged fabrics must match exactly that is they must contain the same FCS members and in the same order or the merge will fail 3 Reset the version sta...

Page 744: ... See Security Commands on page 941 Operands None Example To reset the version stamp to zero See Also secfabricshow secmodedisable secmodeenable secmodeshow sectransabort primaryfcs admin secversionreset About to reset version stamp to 0 Are you sure yes y no n no y Committing configuration done Security Policy Version Stamp has been set to 0 primaryfcs admin ...

Page 745: ...gh 4 are for switch blade slots 1 through 4 respectively Sensors 5 and 6 are for the two CPs in slots 5 and 6 respectively If you are logged into Logical switch 1 sensors 1 and 2 are for the two CPs in slots 5 and 6 respectively Sensors 3 through 6 are for switch blade slots 7 through 10 respectively If you are logged into the Active CP through the console port you are prompted to specify the logi...

Page 746: ...e 2 Fan 3 is OK value is 5910 sensor 9 type 2 Fan 4 is OK value is 5970 sensor 10 type 2 Fan 5 is OK value is 6030 sensor 11 type 2 Fan 6 is absent value is unknown sensor 12 type 3 Power Supply 1 is absent value is unknown sensor 13 type 3 Power Supply 2 is absent value is unknown switch30 admin switch admin sensorshow sensor 1 Temperature is Ok value is 39 C sensor 2 Temperature is Absent sensor...

Page 747: ...specified module Operands This command has the following operands Example The following example shows how set debug level of module named NS to value 3 See Also dbgshow setdbg module_name Specify the name of the module where you want to view the debug and verbosity levels Module names are case sensitive This operand is optional level Specify the debug level for the specified module This operand is...

Page 748: ...quire a reboot to take effect ESD mode when enabled modifies the behavior of the diagnostic test methods and post scripts The exact behavior varies but most commonly consists of disabling the ports defined with diagsetports when spinsilk or other functional tests are run for ESD or EMI testing purposes Operands This command has the following operands If no operand is specified the current value is...

Page 749: ...ric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Example To set ESD mode See Also spinsilk switch admin setesdmode Esd Mode is 0 Disabled switch admin setesdmode 1 Config update Succeeded Esd Mode is now 1 Enabled switch admin ...

Page 750: ...s in that mode until the next execution of setgbicmode The mode becomes active as soon as this command is executed It does not require a reboot to take effect The GBIC mode when enabled forces crossPortTest and spinSilk to limit testing to ports with GBICs present Consequently testing is limited to those ports with a suspected problem Note The current technology in the StorageWorks Core switch and...

Page 751: ...The mode is saved in non volatile memory and remains unchanged until the next execution of the setgbicmode command This operand is optional show V4 1 x only Specify the show operand to display the current setting This operand is optional switch admin setgbicmode 1 Committing configuration done GBIC mode is now ON switch admin setgbicmode 0 Committing configuration done GBIC mode is now OFF switch ...

Page 752: ...s soon as this command is executed It does not require a reboot to take effect The SFP mode when enabled forces crossPortTest and spinSilk to limit testing to ports with SFPs present Consequently testing is limited to those ports with a suspected problem Operands This command has the following operands setsfpmode mode Specify 1 to enable SFP mode or 0 to disable SFP mode If no mode is specified th...

Page 753: ...Reference Guide Example To enable or disable SFP mode See Also crossPortTest spinSilk switch admin setSFPMode 1 SFP mode is now 1 Enabled switch admin setSFPMode 0 SFP mode is now 0 disabled switch admin setSFPMode show SFP mode is now 0 disabled ...

Page 754: ...de The mode becomes active as soon as this command is executed It does not require a reboot to take effect The SPLB mode when enabled forces the spinSilk command to disable two port loopback for M M connected ports This may be useful to isolate internal switch problems from SFP problems since the internal paths are used much less with SPLB mode enabled The SPLB mode when disabled forces the spinSi...

Page 755: ...s the following operands Example To enable or disable a two port loopback See Also setgbicmode setSfpMode spinSilk P1 TX P2 RX P1 TX P2 TX P1 RX P2 TX mode Specify 1 to enable SPLB mode or 0 to disable SPLB mode For V3 1 x the default if no operand specified is 0 SPLB disabled For V4 1 x if no mode is specified the current value is displayed This operand is optional show V4 1 x only Specify the sh...

Page 756: ...n Use this command to set the verbose level of the specified module Operands This command has the following operands Example The following example shows how to set the verbose level of module named NS to value 3 See Also dbgshow setverbose module_name Specify the name of the module for which verbose level is to be set level Specify the verbose level to be set for the specified module switch admin ...

Page 757: ...ed by a background process The sfpshow command retrieves the latest information from cache The cache values for each SFP are updated when the SFP is hot plugged when it is removed or when the Fabric OS polls the SFPs In the StorageWorks Core switch if there is a lot of activity on the switch poll updates may take several minutes Use this command with no operand to display a summary of all SFPs in ...

Page 758: ... or 7 through 10 and port number 0 through 15 The StorageWorks Core switch has a total of 1 10 slots Slot number 5 and 6 are control processor cards and slot 1 through 4 and 7 through 10 are port cards On each port card there are 16 ports counted from the bottom 0 to 15 portnumber Specify a port number Valid values for port number vary depending on the switch type This operand is optional switch a...

Page 759: ...ransceiver 050c402000000000 100 200_MB s M5 M6 sw Inter_dist Encoding 1 8B10B Baud Rate 21 units 100 megabaud Length 9u 0 units 100 meters Length 50u 30 units 10 meters Length 625u 13 units 10 meters Length Cu 0 units 1 meter Vendor Name FINISAR CORP Vendor OUI 00 90 65 Vendor PN FTRJ 8519 3 2 5 Vendor Rev X1 Options 0012 Loss_of_Sig Tx_Disable BR Max 0 BR Min 0 Serial No H112YFR Date Code 010418 ...

Page 760: ...iption Use this command to disable a non faulty blade unit while leaving the blade unit powered on Operands This command has the following operand Example To power off blade unit 3 See Also slotOn slotShow slotOff slot Specify the physical slot number of the blade to be disabled This operand is required switch admin slotOff 3 Slot 3 is being disabled ...

Page 761: ...Description Use this command to re enable a blade unit that was previously disabled Operands This command has the following operand Example To power off blade unit 3 See Also slotOff slotShow slotOn slot Specify the physical slot number of the blade to be enabled This operand is required switch admin sloton 3 Slot 3 is being enabled ...

Page 762: ...wer to a blade unit The slot must have a valid blade unit present and the blade unit must be of a type that can be powered off Operands This command has the following operand Example To power off blade unit 3 See Also slotPowerOn slotShow slotpoweroff slot Specify the physical slot number of the blade to be powered down This operand is required switch admin slotPowerOff 3 Slot 3 is being powered o...

Page 763: ... the power to a blade unit The slot must have a valid blade unit present and the blade unit must be currently powered off Operands This command has the following operand Example To power on blade unit 3 See Also slotPowerOff slotShow slotpoweron slot Specify the physical slot number of the blade to be powered on This operand is required switch admin slotPowerOn 3 Powering on slot 3 ...

Page 764: ...lues are as follows slotShow Slot Displays the physical slot number Blade Type Displays the blade type SW BLADE The blade is a switch CP BLADE The blade is a Control Processor UNKNOWN Blade not present or its type is not recognized ID Displays the hardware ID of the blade type Status Displays the status of the blade VACANT The slot is empty INSERTED NOT POWERED ON The blade is present in the slot ...

Page 765: ... is powered on but disabled FAULTY The blade is faulty because an error was detected UNKNOWN The blade is inserted but its state cannot be determined switch admin slotShow Slot Blade Type ID Status 1 SW BLADE 2 FAULTY 2 SW BLADE 2 DISABLED 3 SW BLADE 2 ENABLED 4 SW BLADE 2 DIAG RUNNING POST2 5 CP BLADE 1 ENABLED 6 CP BLADE 1 ENABLED 7 UNKNOWN VACANT 8 SW BLADE 2 DIAG RUNNING POST1 9 SW BLADE 2 INS...

Page 766: ... MIB variables with an SNMP manager The default value is yes HA MIB V4 1 x only Specifying yes means the user can access HA MIB variables with an SNMP manager The default value is yes SW TRAP Specifying yes means the SNMP management application can receive SW TRAPS from the switch The default value is yes FA TRAP Specifying yes means the SNMP management application can receive FA TRAPS from the sw...

Page 767: ...e options for configuring SNMP MIB traps V3 1 x example See Also agtcfgDefault agtcfgSet agtcfgShow switch admin snmpmibcapset The SNMP Mib Trap Capability has been set to support FE MIB SW MIB FA MIB SW TRAP FA TRAP FA MIB yes y no n yes SW TRAP yes y no n yes FA TRAP yes y no n yes no change ...

Page 768: ...retransmitted on the same E_Port Several frames are then sent to the neighbor port attached to each active E_Port specified Since the default action for such frames which never occur for normal traffic is to route them back to the sender the frames that are sent in this manner will circulate until the test stops them The following conditions must be met before spinfab can execute a successful run ...

Page 769: ...e same time The switch will remain in normal operation while this test is running however some performance degradation will occur due to the ISL links being saturated with test frames Because of this you should use caution when running this test on live fabrics consider only testing one ISL link at a time and do not run the tests for extended periods of time This test is best combined with the onl...

Page 770: ...s as bad like a normal diagnostic 1 Mark failing ports as BAD 0 do not mark failed ports as bad To minimize the impact on live fabrics this test normally logs errors but does not set the port status to FAILED This parameter is provided to force the failing ports to be marked as BAD in the same manner as other diagnostics In test or qualification environments without live traffic this may be useful...

Page 771: ...gs errors but does not set the port status to FAILED This parameter is provided to force the failing ports to be marked as BAD in the same manner as other diagnostics In test or qualification environments without live traffic this may be useful with large values of nmil This mode is disabled by default domain value V4 1 x only The domain parameter is used to specify a specific remote domain that t...

Page 772: ...0 passed port 4 test status 0x02000000 SKIPPED switch admin setdbg DIAG 2 switch admin spinfab 3 0 3 spinFab running port 1 Rx 1 million frames port 0 Rx 1 million frames port 2 Rx 1 million frames port 3 Rx 1 million frames port 1 Rx 2 million frames port 0 Rx 2 million frames port 2 Rx 2 million frames port 3 Rx 2 million frames port 1 Rx 3 million frames port 0 Rx 3 million frames port 2 Rx 3 m...

Page 773: ...TS_BADOS ERR_STATS_C3DISC ERR_STATS_CRC ERR_STATS_ENCIN ERR_STATS_ENCOUT ERR_STATS_TRUNC ERR_STAT_2LONG ERR_STAT_BADEOF ERR_STAT_BADOS ERR_STAT_C3DISC ERR_STAT_CRC ERR_STAT_ENCIN ERR_STAT_ENCOUT ERR_STAT_TRUNC FINISH_MSG_ERR INIT MBUF_STATE_ERR NO_SEGMENT PORT_ABSENT switch admin spinfab ports 1 0 1 2 spinfab running spinfab Completed 11 megs status passed port 0 test status 0x00000000 passed port...

Page 774: ...ce Guide PORT_DIED PORT_ENABLE PORT_M2M PORT_STOPPED PORT_WRONG RXQ_RAM_PERR STATS STATS_C3FRX STATS_FRX STATS_FTX TIMEOUT XMIT See Also camtest centralmemorytest cmemretentiontest cmitest crossporttest itemlist portloopbacktest setDbg spinsilk sramretentiontest ...

Page 775: ...mitted through port N Likewise frames received by port N are retransmitted through port M Each port M sends 1 frame to its partner port N through an external fiber cable exercising all the switch components Note The spinsilk command may not be executed on an operational switch You must first disable the switch using the switchDisable command The cables can be connected to any port combination with...

Page 776: ...hs via port M The 4 frames used are as follows a 2112 bytes of BYTE_LFSR b 1000 bytes of CSPAT c 128 bytes of RANDOM and d 512 bytes of RDRAM_PAT The partner port N eventually sends 4 similar frames as follows a 2112 bytes of BYTE_LFSR b 928 bytes of CSPAT c 200 bytes of RANDOM and d 480 bytes of RDRAM_PAT 5 Periodically check that each port has not died each port s frames transmitted counter is s...

Page 777: ...es use unique data types and the eighth is the same as the first spinSilk Modes These are the test modes These modes can be used together to test specific ports Loopback mode SFP mode LoopBack Mode lbmode There are four loopback modes that can be used when executing the spinSilk command The modes are specified by entering 0 for cable mode This loopback mode is the default mode and tests only M N c...

Page 778: ... ASIC See the setSplbmode command for more information on how the loopback mode setting changes the execution of this command GBIC SFP Mode sfpmode V3 1 x If the spinSilk command is executed with SFP mode activated only ports containing SFPs are tested To activate SFP mode execute the following command prior to executing the spinSilk command switch admin setgbicmode 1 The state of the SFP mode is ...

Page 779: ...sed to determine those switch components that are not functioning properly Operands This command has the following operands nmillionframes V3 1 x only Specify a number of times representing a million frames per port to execute this test If omitted the default value used is 0xfffffffe or almost infinite for practical purposes as passcount sfpmode V3 1 x only Specify 1 to enable SFP mode for the tes...

Page 780: ... Loopback 1 Port Loopback loopback plugs 2 External SERDES loopback 3 Silkscreen loopback 4 Serial link wrapback 5 Internal parallel loopback spd_mode mode V4 1 x only Specify the speed mode for the test For 1 Gbit sec only products it is ignored The exact operation of modes 3 through 6 depends upon the loopback mode selected When speed modes 3 through 6 are used with cables they must be connected...

Page 781: ...is optional ports itemlist V4 1 x only Specify a list of user ports to test By default all of the user ports in the current switch are tested This option may be used to restrict testing to the specified ports switch admin spinsilk 2 Running Spin Silk One moment please switchName switch switchType 2 2 switchState Testing switchRole Disabled switchDomain 1 unconfirmed switchId fffc01 switchWwn 10 00...

Page 782: ...TATS_2LONG ERR_STATS_BADEOF ERR_STATS_BADOS ERR_STATS_C3DISC ERR_STATS_CRC ERR_STATS_ENCIN ERR_STATS_ENCOUT ERR_STATS_TRUNC ERR_STAT_2LONG ERR_STAT_BADEOF ERR_STAT_BADOS ERR_STAT_C3DISC ERR_STAT_CRC ERR_STAT_ENCIN ERR_STAT_ENCOUT ERR_STAT_TRUNC FDET_PERR FINISH_MSG_ERR FTPRT_STATUS_ERR INIT LESSN_STATUS_ERR MBUF_STATE_ERR MBUF_STATUS_ERRBAR NO_SEGMENT PORT_ABSENT PORT_DIED PORT_ENABLE PORT_M2M POR...

Page 783: ...abric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide TIMEOUT XMIT See Also backport camtest centralmemorytest cmemretentiontest cmitest crossporttest itemlist portloopbacktest portregtest ramtest sramretentiontest statstest ...

Page 784: ...s to write a fill pattern to all SRAMs wait 10 seconds and then read all SRAMs checking that data read matches data previously written Then the test is repeated using the complementary version of the pattern For V4 1 x the test will use four QUAD_FILL patterns and one QUAD_RAMP pattern with random seed The following patterns are used 0xffffffff and 0x00000000 0x55555555 and 0xaaaaaaaa 0x33333333 a...

Page 785: ...d will be relative to this slot number The default is set to 0 and designed to operate on fixed port count products passcnt count V4 1 x only Specify the number of times to execute this test The default value is 1 q to stop ports itemlist V4 1 x only Specify a list of blade ports to test By default all the blade ports in the specified slot will be used See itemlist for more details skip bitmask V4...

Page 786: ...6 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide For V4 1 x BUS_TIMEOUT REGERR REGERR_UNRST See Also camtest centralmemorytest cmemretentiontest cmitest crossporttest filterTest portloopbacktest portRegTest ramtest spinsilk ...

Page 787: ...command displays the current soft serial number When ssn is entered with the operand specified it sets the soft serial number to a user specified value which can be a numeric value from 1 to 122 bytes Operands This command has the following operand Example The following example displays the current soft serial number snn soft serial number Specify the soft serial number between 1 and 122 character...

Page 788: ... OS Commands 788 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide The following example sets the soft serial number See Also None switch admin ssn BRCD_101 Committing configuration done switch admin ssn BRCD_101 ...

Page 789: ... The number of received frames with the CRC error that matched the SID DID pair specified in the LINK table There are a total 16 of these statistics counters 0 15 respectively 2 The number of received words in frames that matched the SID DID pair specified in the LINK table There are a total 16 of these statistics counters 0 15 respectively 3 The number of transmitted words in frames that matched ...

Page 790: ...ubtest may report one or more of the following error messages DIAG STSINIT DIAG STSNULL DIAG STSSID DIAG STSXMIT DIAG STSRCV DIAG STSFRMCNT passcount V3 1 x only passcnt count V4 1 x only Specify the number of times to perform this test The default value is 1 This operand is optional ports itemlist V4 1 x only Specify a list of user ports to run the test If omitted all the user ports in the switch...

Page 791: ...rsion 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide DIAG STSWRDCNT DIAG STSALPACNT See Also camtest centralmemorytest cmemretentiontest cmitest crossporttest filtertest portloopbacktest portregtest ramtest spinsilk sramretentiontest turboramtest ...

Page 792: ...If porttest is running on a non singlemode use stopporttest to stop the test Operands This command has the following operands stopporttest ports V3 1 x only Specify the port to stop the test on If omitted the test will be executed on all possible ports Default value is 1 stop the test on all ports Valid values are 1 Stop the test on all ports This operand is optional ports itemlist V4 1 x only Spe...

Page 793: ...ic OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Example To stop the porttest on an active switch See Also crossporttest fporttest loopporttest portloopbacktest porttest porttestshow spinfab switch admin stopporttest switch admin ...

Page 794: ... port1 port2 lines Availability All users Release V3 1 x and V4 1 x Description Use this command to print the switch information for debugging purposes Note The output of this command can be very long This command executes the listed commands in the following order 1 fabstateshow V4 1 x only 2 fabswitchshow V4 1 x only 3 version 4 uptime 5 tempshow 6 psshow 7 licenseshow 8 diagshow V3 1 x only sup...

Page 795: ...ortrouteshow each port V3 1 x only 19 portstructshow each port V3 1 x only 20 bloomdatashow each port V3 1 x only 21 fabricshow 22 trunkshow 23 topologyshow 24 qlshow V3 1 x only 25 fashow V3 1 x only 26 portcfglport V3 1 x only 27 nsshow 28 nsallshow 29 nscamshow V3 1 x only 30 cfgshow 31 slotshow V4 1 x only 32 chassisshow V4 1 x only 33 fanshow V4 1 x only 34 historyshow V4 1 x only 35 sbin boo...

Page 796: ... can use diff to see if something is missing or different 42 bin ps elfH V4 1 x only Displays Process list PID and which daemons switch is running 43 bin rpm qa V4 1 x only Displays package manager exe with which you can query all packages running on switch 44 bin cat var log dmesg V4 1 x only Displays the messages file 45 bin cat etc fstab V4 1 x only Displays the mount points 46 bin cat etc mtab...

Page 797: ...on If firstPort is specified but lastPort is not specified only firstPort information is printed for the port based commands portShow portRegShow portRouteShow If no operand is supplied firstPort is set to 0 and lastPort is set to maximum port of switch This operand is optional nLog V3 1 x only Specify the number of lines of PortLogDump to print 0 dump all lines default N dump the last N lines 0 s...

Page 798: ...ly endPort information is printed for the port based commands portshow portregshow portrouteshow If no operand is supplied startPort is set to 0 and endPort is set to maximum port of switch This operand is required lines V4 1 x only Specify the number of lines output from this command This operand is optional switch admin supportshow Kernel 5 3 1 Fabric OS v3 1 Made on Tue Apr 6 16 57 22 PDT 2002 ...

Page 799: ... supportshow 4 0 15 version Kernel 2 4 2 Fabric OS 4 0 0 Made on Thu Oct 25 00 58 55 2001 Flash Thu Oct 25 00 58 55 2001 BootProm Unknown uptime 11 46pm up 4 39 3 users load average 1 85 1 45 1 15 tempshow Index Slot State Centigrade Fahrenheit 1 1 Absent 2 2 Absent 3 3 Absent 4 4 Ok 40 104 5 5 Ok 27 80 6 6 Absent sample output truncated ...

Page 800: ...f by the user Beaconing mode affects only the port LEDs Other commands are still executable and functional The normal flashing LED pattern associated with an active faulty or disabled port is suppressed and the beaconing pattern is shown However if diagnostic frame based tests portLoopbackTest crossPortTest and spinSilk are executed two patterns are interleaved The diagnostic test flickers the LED...

Page 801: ...switchBeacon 801 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Example To turn beaconing mode ON To turn beaconing mode OFF See Also switchShow switch admin switchBeacon 1 switch admin switchBeacon 0 ...

Page 802: ...y by disabling the switch if it is not already disabled The persistent switch disable configuration overrides all other switch configurations but it does not alter any of them The switchcfgpersistentenable command will enable the switch persistently The persistent switch enable will also re enable all previously set switch configurations The persistent switch disable configuration will override po...

Page 803: ...de Example To disable a switch persistently See Also configure configshow portcfgpersistentdisable portcfgpersistentenable portcfgshow portshow switchcfgpersistentenable switchshow switch admin switchcfgpersistentdisable Committing configuration done Command in progress done ...

Page 804: ...be effective immediately by enabling the switch if it is not already enabled The persistent switch disable configuration overrides all other switch configurations but it does not alter any of them The persistent switch enable will also re enable all previously set switch configurations A persistently enabled switch can temporarily be disabled by switchdisable command until next switch enable power...

Page 805: ...lowing example configures the switch as persistently enabled See Also configure configshow portcfgpersistentdisable portcfgpersistentenable portcfgshow portshow switchcfgpersistentdisable switchshow switch admin switchcfgpersistentenable Committing configuration done Command in progress done ...

Page 806: ...portShow displays achieved speed level and portCfgShow displays the user s desired speed setting In the portShow output the speed level is indicated as the current port speed of 1 Gbps or 2 Gbps In the portCfgShow output the speed level is indicated as 1G 2G or AN Auto Negotiate Operands This command has the following operand switchCfgSpeed speed_level Specify the speed of a port This operand is r...

Page 807: ...switchCfgSpeed 807 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Example To set the speed level for all ports on a switch See Also portCfgSpeed switchShow switch admin switchCfgSpeed 2 done switch admin ...

Page 808: ...Use this command to enable or disable trunking on all the ports of a switch Note This command requires the Trunking license Operands This command has the following operand Example To enable trunking on a switch switchCfgTrunk mode Specify 1 to enable trunking on all the ports on this switch Specify 0 to disable trunking on all the ports on this switch This operand is required switch admin switchCf...

Page 809: ...switchCfgTrunk 809 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also portCfgShow portCfgTrunkPort portShow switchShow ...

Page 810: ...tches reconfigure The switch must be disabled before making configuration changes using configure or configDefault or before running many of the diagnostic tests All commands that require the switch to be disabled send an error if invoked while the switch is enabled The switch does not need to be disabled before rebooting or powering off As each port is disabled the front panel LED changes to a sl...

Page 811: ...switchDisable 811 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also switchEnable switchShow ...

Page 812: ...s or to run diagnostics If the switch is connected to a fabric it rejoins the fabric When this command is issued the 10 second fabric stability count down is displayed If this switch remains the principal switch at the end of the countdown then it assigns itself a domain ID If another switch assumes the principal role then this switch becomes a subordinate switch and accepts a domain ID from the p...

Page 813: ...chEnable 813 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Example To enable a switch See Also switchDisable switchShow switch admin switchEnable 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 fabric Principal switch fabric Domain 1 ...

Page 814: ...n the output of many telnet commands such as fabricshow Enter this command with no operand to display the current switch name Use this command with the newName operand to assign a new switch name Switch names can be up to 15 characters long must begin with an alpha character and can consist of a combination of alpha numeric and underscore characters Changing the switch name causes a domain address...

Page 815: ...switchName 815 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Example To change a switch name to sw10 See Also fabricShow switchShow switch admin switchName sw10 Committing configuration Done sw10 admin ...

Page 816: ...sis The administrator uses this command when the problem with the switch cannot be determined Using this command brings the switch back to an operational state without disturbing the software state of the system in general This command is equal to running switchShutdown and switchStart Note For the StorageWorks Core switch the switchreboot command will reboot only the logical switch you are curren...

Page 817: ... Done Initializing kernel modules Done setup FCIP IP ifconfig fc1 ip 192 168 69 190 netmask 255 255 255 0 Starting all switch daemons Done Powering on slot 7 Done Checking diagnostics Start Apache etc rc d init d httpd sh start 1 192 168 174 95 192 168 69 190 Start snmpd etc rc d init d snmpd sh start 1 starting http server 1 Starting snmpd n SNMP Research SNMP Agent Resident Module Version 15 2 1...

Page 818: ...e Displays the switch symbolic name switchType Displays the switch model and firmware revision number switchState Displays the switch state online offline testing faulty switchMode V3 1 x only Displays the switch mode native switchRole Displays the switch role principal subordinate disabled switchDomain Displays the switch domain ID 0 31 or 1 239 switchId Displays the switch embedded port D_ID swi...

Page 819: ...he StorageWorks Core switch has 10 slots numbered from 1 to 4 and 7 to 10 Slots 5 and 6 are control processor cards This parameter is for V4 1 x only Port Number V3 1 x only Port V4 1 x only Port number Valid values vary depending on the switch type Module Type V3 1 x only SFP V4 1 x only Port module type SFP or other No module present sw Shortwave laser lw Longwave laser cu Copper id Serial ID Us...

Page 820: ...long distance level number See portcfglongdistance for the level description comment The comment field may be blank or it may display Disabled The port is disabled Bypassed Port is bypassed loop only Loopback Port is in loopback mode E_Port Fabric port shows WWN and name of attached switch F_Port Point to point port shows WWN of attached N_Port G_Port Point to point but not yet E_Port or F_Port L_...

Page 821: ...play one or more of the following WWN of the switch connected Switch name of the switch connected One or more inter switch link attributes Trunking information F Port An F port may display the port WWN of the device attached to it switch admin switchshow switchName switch switchType 16 2 switchState Online switchMode Native switchRole Subordinate switchDomain 7 switchId fffc07 switchWwn 10 00 00 6...

Page 822: ...unk port master is Slot 7 Port 5 7 7 7 id N2 Online E Port Trunk port master is Slot 7 Port 5 8 7 8 N2 No_Module 9 7 9 N2 No_Module 10 7 10 N2 No_Module 11 7 11 N2 No_Module 12 7 12 id N2 No_Light 13 7 13 id N2 No_Light 14 7 14 id N2 No_Light 15 7 15 id N2 Online L Port 8 public 32 9 0 N2 No_Module 33 9 1 N2 No_Module 34 9 2 N2 No_Module 35 9 3 N2 No_Module 36 9 4 N2 No_Module 37 9 5 N2 No_Module ...

Page 823: ...switchShow 823 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also switchDisable switchEnable switchName ...

Page 824: ...s command disables a logical switch in a StorageWorks Core switch without disturbing the software state of the system in general This command has to be used in combination with switchStart This command brings down all the daemons associated with the switch frees the resources and object states associated with the switch to a clear state and disables all the ports and blades associated with the swi...

Page 825: ... current logical switch without disrupting the other switch in the chassis See Also switchReboot switchStart switch admin switchshutdown Stopping all switch daemons Done Powering off slot 1 Done Powering off slot 4 Done Checking all slots are powered off Done Cleaning up kernel modules Done ...

Page 826: ...h chassis This command enables a logical switch in a StorageWorks Core switch without disturbing the software state of the system in general This command has to be used in combination with switchShutdown This command starts all the daemons associated with the switch initializes the object states associated with the switch to a clear state and enables all the ports blades associated with the switch...

Page 827: ...tch to operational See Also switchReboot switchShutdown switch admin switchstart Initializing kernel modules Done Starting all switch daemons Done Powering on slot 1 Done q to stop Powering on slot 4 Done q to stop Checking diagnostics Done setup FCIP IP ifconfig fc0 ip 0 0 0 0 netmask 255 255 255 0 ...

Page 828: ...mmand will print the current parameters in a three column table format The first column specifies the contributor the second column specifies the minimum number that contributes to the DOWN FAILED status the third column specifies the minimum number that contributes to the MARGINAL WARNING status This command then prompts the user to change the values for each policy parameter The default values f...

Page 829: ...in the calculation of the overall switch status ISLStatus monitors ISLs that are part of a defined switch group The status of other ISLs on the same switch but outside of the group definition will not be considered when calculating switch status If no switch groups are defined on this switch then these ISLStatus settings will have no effect on switch status The ISLStatus does not affect the status...

Page 830: ...s 0 0 the policy parameter is NOT applicable to the switch Simply hit the Return key The minimum number of FaultyPorts contributing to DOWN status 0 64 2 FaultyPorts contributing to MARGINAL status 0 64 1 MissingSFPs contributing to DOWN status 0 64 0 MissingSFPs contributing to MARGINAL status 0 64 0 1 Bad PowerSupplies contributing to DOWN status 0 4 2 Bad PowerSupplies contributing to MARGINAL ...

Page 831: ...itch The command will print the current parameters in a three column table format The first column specifies the contributor the second column specifies the minimum number that contributes to the DOWN FAILED status the third column specifies the minimum number that contributes to the MARGINAL WARNING status The default values for the policy parameters are as follows switchStatusPolicyShow Table 17...

Page 832: ...en the status of the switch changes to DOWN Operands None Example To display the switch status policy See Also switchStatusPolicySet switchStatusShow Fans 2 1 PortStatus 0 0 ISLStatus 2 1 Table 17 Contributor Value and Status Continued Contributor Default Value for DOWN Default Value for MARGINAL switch admin switchStatusPolicyShow The current overall switch status policy parameters Down Marginal ...

Page 833: ...us is calculated based on the most severe status of all contributors Internal Switch Status Faulty Ports Missing SFPs Power Supplies Fans Temperatures Port Status The overall status can be one of the following Healthy OK every contributor is healthy Marginal Warning one or more components are causing a warning status Down Failed one or more contributors have failed If the overall status is not HEA...

Page 834: ... have been fixed See Also switchStatusPolicySet switchStatusPolicyShow switch admin switchStatusShow The overall switch status is Marginal Warning Contributing factors 1 missing power supply triggered the Marginal Warning status 1 bad fans 2 good fans triggered the Marginal Warning status 1 missing SFP triggered the Marginal Warning status switch admin switchStatusShow The overall switch status is...

Page 835: ...time Availability All users Release V4 1 x Description Use this command to display the current time and the amount of time the switch has been operational Operands None Example To view the uptime for the switch See Also switchReboot switchShutdown switchStart switchuptime switch admin switchuptime 2 00pm up for 17 hrs 44 mins sqab14 admin ...

Page 836: ... process available on most UNIX systems that reads and forwards system messages to the appropriate log files and users depending on the system configuration When one or more IP addresses are configured the switch forwards all error log entries to the syslogd on the specified servers Up to six servers are supported Operands This command has the following operands syslogdIpAdd IPaddr V3 1 x only Spe...

Page 837: ...rsion 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Example To add the address 11 22 33 44 to the list of machines to which system messages are sent V3 1 x example See Also errShow syslogdIpRemove syslogdIpShow switch admin syslogdIpAdd 11 22 33 44 ...

Page 838: ...ss of the server which is running the syslogd process Operands This command has the following operand Example To remove the address 11 22 33 44 from the list of machines to which system messages are sent V4 1 x example syslogdIpRemove IPaddress V3 1 x only Specify the IP address enclosed in quotation marks of the server running syslogd This operand is required ip_address V4 1 x only Specify the IP...

Page 839: ...syslogdIpRemove 839 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also errShow syslogdIpAdd syslogdIpShow ...

Page 840: ...V3 1 x and V4 1 x Description Use this command to display all syslog daemon IP addresses in the configuration database Operands None Example To display all syslog daemon IP addresses See Also errShow syslogdIpAdd syslogdIpRemove syslogdIpShow switch admin syslogdIpShow syslog IP address 1 11 22 33 44 syslog IP address 2 11 22 33 45 syslog IP address 3 11 22 33 46 ...

Page 841: ...adediagshort Note This command is provided just for compatibility and may be removed in the future releases Operands This command has the following operands systemtest slot slotno Specify which slot to operate on If this option is not specified the current slot will be assumed log logfile Indicates that the output of the command will be placed in a file named by the logfile argument The log file w...

Page 842: ...ting slot 7 user ports 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 11 10 9 8 15 14 13 12 PortRegTest Running Port Register Test passed Test Complete portregtest Pass 1 of 1 Duration 0 hr 2 min 23 sec 0 2 23 443 passed Test return status 0 CentralMemoryTest Running centralmemorytest passed Test Complete centralmemorytest Pass 1 of 1 Duration 0 hr 0 min 19 sec 0 0 19 611 passed Test return status 0 output truncated ...

Page 843: ...rnin switch slot files On the fixed port count products the slot defaults to 0 The command monitors the testing and will terminate the burnin activity if all the elements have failed Each failing slot will only output the first observed fail Since this monitoring is a polling activity the command number output may not be the exact command number that failed After the testing has terminated burnins...

Page 844: ...the database If the diagsetcycle parameter is not specified then the run will use the previously stored values This option does not performs a burninerrclear operation prior to starting the testing operation short Sets the burnin parameters that control the number of frames to 1 The primary use for this command is for software regression testing or a quick validation that all hardware is operation...

Page 845: ...etting parameters for short run systemverification burnin parameters CURRENT KEYWORD DEFAULT 1 number_of_runs 1 2 vib 2 10 thermal 10 SYSTEMVERIFICATION label BURNIN 2 min_lb_mode 2 1 tbr_passes 1 1 prt_on 1 1 cntmem_on 1 1 cmi_on 1 1 retention_on 1 1 cam_on 1 1 flt_passes 50 1 sta_passes 25 1 plb_nframes 100 1 txd_nframes 50 1 xpt_nframes 200 1 bpt_nframes 20 1 slk_nmegs 50 1 bpt_all_nframes 30 1...

Page 846: ... an index The indices start from 1 There can be more than one sensor per slot The slot number to which a sensor belongs is displayed in the column next to the index The temperature readings are given in both Centigrade and Fahrenheit Refer to the Hardware Reference Manual for your switch to determine the normal temperature range values Operands None Example To display the temperature readings of a...

Page 847: ...ch you are logged into not for the entire chassis This example shows a StorageWorks 2 Gb SAN switch See Also fanShow psShow sensorShow slotShow switch admin tempshow Index Slot State Centigrade Fahrenheit 1 1 Ok 47 116 2 2 Absent 3 3 Absent 4 4 Ok 46 114 5 5 Ok 33 91 6 6 Ok 33 91 switch admin switch admin tempshow Index Slot State Centigrade Fahrenheit 1 0 Ok 39 102 2 0 Ok 41 105 3 0 Ok 27 80 4 0 ...

Page 848: ...Use this command with an operand to sets the idle timeout value to the specified minutes Using a timeout value of zero will disable the timeout functionality so that login sessions would never be disconnected Operands This command has the following operand Example The following sets the idle timeout to 10 minutes V3 1 x example timeout timeval Specify the number of minutes for the telnet timeout v...

Page 849: ...timeout 849 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also None ...

Page 850: ... switch to the destination switch and a summary of all ports are routed through that path A path is described by the output port that a frame addressed to a certain domain will be forwarded to by the switches routing hardware in order to reach the domain With the domain number specified this command displays the topology information for the specified destination domain The display contains the fol...

Page 851: ...idth of the out port Bandwidth Demand The maximum bandwidth demand by the in ports Flags Always D indicating a dynamic path A dynamic path is discovered automatically by the FSPF path selection protocol domainnumber Specify the destination domain for which topology information is to be displayed This operand is optional When no domain number is specified this command displays the topology informat...

Page 852: ...l Domain ID 1 Domain 6 Metric 500 Name cylon218 Path Count 4 Hops 1 Out Port 60 In Ports None Total Bandwidth 2 Gbps Bandwidth Demand 0 Flags D Hops 1 Out Port 61 In Ports None Total Bandwidth 2 Gbps Bandwidth Demand 0 Flags D Hops 1 Out Port 62 In Ports None Total Bandwidth 2 Gbps Bandwidth Demand 0 Flags D Hops 1 Out Port 58 In Ports None Total Bandwidth 2 Gbps Bandwidth Demand 0 Flags D ...

Page 853: ...1 x and V4 1 x Description Use this command to display information about the track changes commands Operands None Example To display information on the track changes feature commands See Also trackchangesset trackchangesshow trackChangesHelp switch admin trackchangeshelp trackChangesSet Configure alert for login logout config update trackChangesShow Displays status of track changes ...

Page 854: ...in Release V3 1 x and V4 1 x Description This command enables or disables the track changes feature An SNMP TRAP mode can also be enabled Trackable changes are Successful login Unsuccessful login Logout Config file change from task Track changes on Track changes off The output from the track changes feature is dumped to the error log for the switch Use the errDump command or errShow command to vie...

Page 855: ...rand is optional snmptrapmode Specify 1 to enable errors to be sent to the SNMP TRAP in addition to the errlog or specify 0 to disable the SNMP TRAP messages The default if no operand is specified is to disable SNMP TRAP messages This operand is optional switch admin trackchangesset 1 1 0x10276600 tShell Sep 12 17 59 10 INFO TRACK TRACK_ON 4 Track changes on Committing configuration done 0x1027660...

Page 856: ...feature It shows if the feature is turned on or off and if SNMP traps are generated The output from the track changes feature is dumped to the error log for the switch Use the errDump command or errShow command to view the error log Operands None Example To display the status of the track changes feature See Also trackChangesHelp trackChangesSet trackChangesShow switch admin trackChangesShow Track...

Page 857: ...ed on the trunking properties of the two specified ports Switch does not support trunking Trunking license required port x is not E_Port port x trunking disabled port x peed is not 2G port x and port y are not on same quad port x and port y connect to different switches port x is not Trunking port due to E_Port being disabled or trunking may be disabled at remote port port x and port y cannot trun...

Page 858: ...ber to specify port1 Use the switchshow command to view the area numbers for a port This operand is required port2 For V3 1 x specify the second port number of a trunk connection where you want to debug a trunking link error For V4 1 x use the area number to specify port2 Use the switchshow command to view the area numbers for a port This operand is required switch admin trunkdebug 5 6 port 5 and ...

Page 859: ...one trunkShow Trunking Group Number Displays each trunking group on a switch All the ports that are part of this trunking group are displayed Port to port connections Displays the port to port trunking connections WWN Displays the WWN of the connected port deskew Displays the single trip time difference between trunked links Each number corresponds to 10 ns Master Displays whether this trunking po...

Page 860: ...unk switch admin trunkShow 1 1 1 10 00 00 60 69 04 10 83 deskew 16 MASTER 0 0 10 00 00 60 69 04 10 83 deskew 55 2 4 4 10 00 00 60 69 04 01 94 deskew 45 MASTER 5 5 10 00 00 60 69 04 01 94 deskew 34 7 7 10 00 00 60 69 04 01 94 deskew 22 6 6 10 00 00 60 69 04 01 94 deskew 65 3 14 14 10 00 00 60 69 04 10 83 deskew 46 MASTER 15 15 10 00 00 60 69 04 10 83 deskew 33 ...

Page 861: ...n all switches in the fabric but only the Principal switch when the Security feature not enabled or the Primary FCS switch when the Security feature is enabled connect to the NTP server and broadcast Time Service updates All switches in the fabric maintain the current clock server IP address in non volatile memory By default this value is LOCL Changes to the clock server IP address on the Principa...

Page 862: ...fied but is not used by the fabric a warning is displayed and logged When a clock server IP address other than LOCL is specified the date command will be restricted to display only See the date command for more details Operands This command has the following operand If no operand is specified the current value is displayed Example The following example shows how to display the current clock server...

Page 863: ...ription Use this command to display a list of time service commands Operands None Example To display a list of time service commands See Also None tshelp switch admin tshelp tsTimeZone Set time zone tsClockServer Set Get External NTP Server address NOTE don t run help command after firmwaredownload without reboot It will give you wrong information switch admin ...

Page 864: ...ons All switches are by default in the 0 0 time zone that is GMT If all switches in a fabric are in one time zone it is possible to leave the time zone setup at the default Time zone is used only in computing local time which is used for error reporting and logging An incorrect time zone setup will not affect the switch operation in any way Enter this command with no parameters to display the time...

Page 865: ...o GMT This operand must be specified as an integer Valid values are 12 through 12 This operand is optional minuteOffset Specify the number of minutes relative to the hourOffset This operand must be specified as an integer Valid values are 30 0 or 30 This operand is optional switch admin tsTimeZone Time Zone Hour Offset 0 Time Zone Minute Offset 0 switch admin tsTimeZone 3 30 switch admin tsTimeZon...

Page 866: ...ST circuitry These same SRAMS are tested by portRegTest and sramRetentionTest using PCI operations but for this test the BIST controller is able to perform the SRAM write and read operations at a much faster rate It is also able to test one SRAM in each quadrant of every chip in parallel The following RAMs CAMs are tested using TurboRAM test logic TX Buffer List Descriptor RAM TX Q Arb Loop FIFO R...

Page 867: ...nating FFFF 0000 pattern Subtest 1 turboram memory fill 2 For each incrementing address read FFFF 0000 pattern and write 0000 FFFF Subtest 2 turboram r m w inc 1 3 For each incrementing address read 0000 FFFF pattern and write FFFF 0000 Subtest 3 turboram r m w inc 2 4 For each decrementing address read FFFF 0000 pattern and write 0000 FFFF Subtest 4 turboram r m w dec 1 5 For each decrementing ad...

Page 868: ...unted from 1 to 10 Slot number 5 and 6 are control processor cards and slot 1 through 4 and 7 through 10 are switch cards On each switch card there are 16 ports counted from the bottom 0 to 15 A particular port must be represented by both slot number 1 through 4 or 7 through 10 and port number 0 through 15 This operand is not required for switches that do not have slots passcnt count V4 1 x only S...

Page 869: ...turboRamTest 869 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also camtest centralmemorytest cmemretentiontest cmitest portregtest ramtest sramretentiontest ...

Page 870: ...emory using its own TXA and TXD path The frame is then looped back one more time and is sent back to the CPU where it is compared with the transmitted data Only one frame is transmitted and received at a time An external cable is not required to run this test The port sending frames displays a flickering green LED while the test is running The test method is as follows 1 Set all ports present for ...

Page 871: ...0xbc 0x23 0x47 7 RANDOM 0x25 0x7f 0x6e 0x9a Since this test requires that two ports can send and receive frames it is strongly suggested that you run portloopbacktest before attempting to run this test Operands This command has the following operands Example To run a functional test of TXA and TXD connections passcount Specify the number of times to perform this test The default value is 0xfffffff...

Page 872: ... failures the test may report one or more of the following error messages DIAG INIT DIAG PORTDIED DIAG XMIT DIAG TIMEOUT DIAG ERRSTAT DIAG STATS DIAG DATA See Also camtest centralmemorytest cmemretentiontest cmitest crossporttest portloopbacktest portregtest ramtest spinsilk sramretentiontest ...

Page 873: ...es greater than or equal to 60 seconds the time is displayed in minutes The output format adjusts accordingly The reason for the last switch reboot is also recorded in the error log Reasons are listed below Not all the below responses are applicable to all switch models uptime Unknown Reason is unknown Bus time out Port ASIC was accessed and no response was received Bus error Non existent system a...

Page 874: ...x example See Also date errShow fastboot reboot Reboot Last reboot was caused by a user from any management interface Powerfail NMI Power supply caused a nonmaskable interrupt Watchdog NMI Watchdog timer caused a nonmaskable interrupt PushButton NMI Push buttons 2 and 4 were depressed for two seconds causing a nonmaskable interrupt Software NMI Firmware caused a nonmaskable interrupt Switch admin ...

Page 875: ... is not usable then the routing assignment is not affected by this command When OutArea port becomes usable again the static route assignment for InArea is enforced OutArea port is usable if it is on a minimum cost path to the destination domain InArea port can be either an F_Port or an E_Port Note When using static routes load sharing may be affected The switch attempts to achieve optimum load sh...

Page 876: ...omain 2 to go through port 5 See Also configShow interfaceShow uRouteRemove uRouteShow InArea Specify the port to be statically routed This operand is required Domain Specify the destination domain This operand is required OutArea Specify the output port where traffic is forwarded This operand is required switch admin uRouteConfig 1 2 5 done switch admin configShow route ucastRoute 1 2 5 route uca...

Page 877: ...change It changes if the previous static route was not along a minimum cost path Also after this command is issued the load sharing to Domain is re evaluated InArea can be either an F_Port or an E_Port Operands This command has the following operands Examples To remove a static route for all traffic coming in from port 1 and addressed to domain 2 uRouteRemove InArea The port that is statically rou...

Page 878: ...Fabric OS Commands 878 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide See Also configShow uRouteConfig uRouteShow ...

Page 879: ...on switch When no operand is specified this command displays the routing information for all the active ports on the local switch to all the domains in the fabric When only the slot number and port number are specified this command displays the routing information for the specified port to all the domains connected to it When the slot number port number and domain number are all specified this com...

Page 880: ...next hop These are the domain number and the port number of the switch to which Out Port is connected slotnumber V4 1 x only Specify the slot number for a StorageWorks Core switch For all other switches this operand is not required The slot number must be followed by a slash and the port number so that each port is represented by both slot number 1 through 4 or 7 through 10 and port number 0 throu...

Page 881: ...ow topologyShow uRouteConfig uRouteRemove switch admin urouteshow Local Domain ID 3 In Port Domain Out Port Metric Hops Flags Next Dom Port 0 1 11 1000 1 D 1 0 11 2 0 1500 2 D 4 0 4 0 500 1 D 4 0 16 1 27 1000 1 D 1 1 27 2 16 1500 2 D 4 16 4 0 500 1 D 4 0 switch admin urouteshow 1 11 Local Domain ID 3 In Port Domain Out Port Metric Hops Flags Next Dom Port 11 2 16 1500 2 D 4 16 4 16 500 1 D 4 16 sw...

Page 882: ...arts running flash firmware at power on However in the time period between firmwareDownload and the next reboot the dates can differ Operands None version Kernel Displays the version of switch kernel operating system Fabric OS Displays the version of switch Fabric OS Made on Displays the build date of firmware running in switch Flash Displays the build date of firmware stored in flash PROMs BootPr...

Page 883: ... The following example shows the firmware version information on a StorageWorks Core switch See Also firmwareDownload reboot switch admin version Kernel 2 4 2 Fabric OS V4 1 x Made on Fri Feb 1 23 02 08 2002 Flash Fri Feb 1 18 03 35 2002 BootProm 3 1 13b switch admin ...

Page 884: ... the switch The WWN is shown in the output of the switchShow command This command with no parameters displays the current WWN value This command with a parameter sets the switch s WWN to the new value WWN names must have eight colon separated fields each consisting of 1 or 2 hexadecimal digits between 0 and off with no spaces After the world wide name is changed the user is prompted to reboot the ...

Page 885: ...wwn 885 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Operands None Example To display the switch WWN See Also switchShow switch admin wwn 10 00 00 60 69 00 54 e9 switch admin ...

Page 886: ...his command changes the Defined Configuration For the change to be preserved across switch reboots it must be saved to non volatile memory using the cfgsave command For the change to become effective an appropriate zone configuration must be enabled using the cfgenable command Note This command requires an Advanced Zoning license When security is enabled this command can only be issued from the Pr...

Page 887: ... This operand is required member Specify a member or list of members to be added in quotation marks separated by semicolons Valid values can be one or more of the following For V3 1 x a switch domain and physical port number pair For example 2 12 For V4 1 x a switch domain and port area number pair For example 2 20 View the area numbers for ports using the switchShow command Node or port WWN Quick...

Page 888: ...r empty lists are not allowed The members are described by a list of member definitions separated by semicolons Specify ports by domain and port area number The values are entered as a pair of numbers s p where s is the switch number domain ID and p is the port area number For example 2 20 specifies port area number 20 on switch domain 2 When a zone member is specified by port area number then all...

Page 889: ...s used to define a zone may be mixed For example a zone defined with the following members 2 12 2 14 10 00 00 60 69 00 00 8a would contain all devices connected to switch 2 ports 12 and 14 and to the device with the World Wide Name 10 00 00 60 69 00 00 8a either node name or port name at the port in the fabric to which it is connected This command changes the Defined Configuration For the change t...

Page 890: ...ne object member List of members to be included in zone in quotation marks separated by semicolons Can be one or more of the following For V3 1 x a switch domain and physical port number pair For example 2 12 For V4 1 x a switch domain and port area number pair For example 2 20 View the area numbers for ports using the switchShow command World Wide Names QuickLoop AL_PAs Zone alias names switch ad...

Page 891: ... it must be saved to non volatile memory using the cfgsave command For the change to become effective an appropriate zone configuration must be enabled using the cfgenable command Note This command requires an Advanced Zoning license When security is enabled this command can only be issued from the Primary FCS switch See Security Commands on page 941 Operands This command has the following operand...

Page 892: ...Fabric OS Commands 892 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Example To delete the zone Blue_zone See Also zoneAdd zoneCreate zoneRemove zoneShow switch admin zoneDelete Blue_zone ...

Page 893: ... 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide Displays help information on zone commands Synopsis zoneHelp Availability All users Release V3 1 x and V4 1 x Description Use this command to display help information on zone commands Operands None zoneHelp ...

Page 894: ...p qloopRemove Remove a member from a qloop qloopShow Print qloop information zoneAdd Add a member to a zone zoneCreate Create a zone zoneDelete Delete a zone zoneRemove Remove a member from a zone zoneShow Print zone information fazoneAdd Add a member to a fabric assist zone fazoneCreate Create a fabric assist zone fazoneDelete Delete a fabric assist zone fazoneRemove Remove a member from a fabric...

Page 895: ...one contains array2 array3 array4 removing array3 array4 succeeds but removing array4 array3 fails If all members are removed the zone is deleted This command changes the Defined Configuration For the change to be preserved across switch reboots it must be saved to non volatile memory using the cfgsave command For the change to become effective an appropriate zone configuration must be enabled usi...

Page 896: ... List of members to be removed from zone in quotation marks separated by semicolons Can be one or more of the following For V3 1 x a switch domain and physical port number pair For example 2 12 For V4 1 x a switch domain and port area number pair For example 2 20 View the area numbers for ports using the switchShow command World Wide Names QuickLoop AL_PAs Zone alias names switch admin zoneRemove ...

Page 897: ...pecified all zone configuration information both defined and enabled is displayed See cfgShow for a description of this display If a parameter is specified it is used as a pattern to match zone configuration names and those that match in the defined configuration are displayed Note This command requires an Advanced Zoning license When security is enabled this command can only be issued from the Pr...

Page 898: ...estion mark that matches any single character Asterisk that matches any string of characters Ranges 0 9a f that match any character within the range mode For V3 1 x specify 1 to display the contents of the transaction buffer or specify 0 to display the contents of the RAM The default value is 0 For V4 1 x specify 0 to display the contents of the transaction buffer the contents of the current trans...

Page 899: ...s page 900 QuickLoop Fabric Assist Mode Commands page 902 Extended Fabric Command page 903 Fabric Watch Commands page 904 Trunking Commands page 905 Advanced Performance Monitoring Commands page 906 Secure Fabric OS Commands page 908 Note For more information about Zoning QuickLoop Extended Fabrics Fabric Watch Trunking or Performance Monitoring refer to the specific user guide for that feature ...

Page 900: ...a zone alias aliCreate Create a zone alias aliDelete Delete a zone alias aliRemove Remove a member from a zone alias Zoning zoneAdd Add a member to a zone zoneCreate Create a zone zoneDelete Delete a zone zoneRemove Remove a member from a zone QuickLoop Zoning qloopAdd Add a member to a QuickLoop qloopCreate Create a QuickLoop qloopDelete Delete a QuickLoop qloopRemove Remove a member from a Quick...

Page 901: ...e Zone Management cfgClear Clear all zone configurations cfgDisable Disable a zone configuration cfgEnable Enable a zone configuration cfgSave Save zone configurations in flash memory cfgTransAbort Aborts the current zoning transaction Table 18 Zoning Commands Continued Command Description ...

Page 902: ...StorageWorks QuickLoop Fabric Assist Version 3 1 x User Guide Note The Quickloop Fabric Assist Mode feature is available on Fabric OS V3 1 x only Table 19 QuickLoop Fabric Assist Mode Commands Command Description fazoneAdd Add members to an existing QuickLoop Fabric Assist zone fazoneCreate Create a QLFA zone fazoneDelete Delete an existing QuickLoop Fabric Assist zone fazoneRemove Remove member o...

Page 903: ...wing command is available with the purchase of an Extended Fabrics license key For detailed information about Extended Fabrics refer to the HP StorageWorks QuickLoop Fabric Assist Version 3 1 x User Guide Table 20 Extended Fabric Command Command Description portCfgLongDistance Configure a port to support long distance links ...

Page 904: ...ze all classes under Fabric Watch fwConfigReload Reload the Fabric Watch configuration fwConfigure Display and enable modification of the Fabric Watch configuration and status fwShow Display the thresholds monitored by Fabric Watch fwAlarmsFilterSet Enable or disable alarms for Fabric Watch fwAlarmsFilterShow Display alarm filtering for Fabric Watch fwFruCfg Display and change FRU state alert conf...

Page 905: ...lable with the purchase of a Trunking license key For detailed information about trunking refer to the HP StorageWorks ISL Trunking Version 3 1 x 4 1 x User Guide Table 22 Trunking Commands Command Description portCfgTrunkport Configure a port for trunking switchCfgTrunk Configure a switch for trunking trunkDebug Debug a trunk link failure ...

Page 906: ... port perfAddSCSIMonitor Add a SCSI traffic frame monitor to a port perfAddUserMonitor Add a user defined monitor to a port perfAddWriteMonitor Add a SCSI Write monitor to a port perfCfgClear Clear the performance monitoring settings from flash memory perfCfgRestore Restore performance monitoring settings from flash memory perfCfgSave Save the current performance monitoring settings to flash memor...

Page 907: ...erence Guide perfShowEEMonitor Display user defined end to end monitors on a port perfShowFilterMonitor Display filter based monitors for a port perfShowPortEEMask Display the current end to end mask of a port Table 23 Performance Monitoring Commands Continued Command Description ...

Page 908: ...y mode is enabled or disabled secnonfcspasswd Set the admin password for non FCS switches secpolicyabort Aborts all changes to the defined database that have not been saved secpolicyactivate Apply defined policy set to all switches in the fabric secpolicyadd Add members to an existing policy secpolicycreate Create a new policy secpolicydelete Delete an existing policy secpolicydump Show all member...

Page 909: ...ersion 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide sectemppasswdset Set a temporary password on a remote switch sectransabort Abort current security transaction secversionreset Reset the version stamp to zero Table 24 Secure Fabric OS Commands Continued Command Description ...

Page 910: ...Fabric OS Commands for Licensed Products 910 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide ...

Page 911: ...911 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide 3 Fabric OS Version Comparison This chapter summarizes the commands available in V3 1 x and V4 1 x ...

Page 912: ...s New command for V4 1 x aliasJoin No Yes New command for V4 1 x aliasPurge No Yes New command for V4 1 x aliasShow Yes Yes New command aliAdd Yes Yes Specify members using area number in V4 1 x aliCreate Yes Yes Specify members using area number in V4 1 x aliDelete Yes Yes aliRemove Yes Yes Specify members using area number in V4 1 x aliShow Yes Yes backplanetest No Yes Specific to the StorageWor...

Page 913: ...with the StorageWorks Core switch centralMemoryTest Yes Yes cfgAdd Yes Yes cfgClear Yes Yes cfgCreate Yes Yes cfgDelete Yes Yes cfgDisable Yes Yes cfgEnable Yes Yes cfgRemove Yes Yes cfgSave Yes Yes cfgShow Yes Yes cfgsize Yes Yes New command cfgTransAbort Yes Yes cfgtransshow Yes Yes New command chassisName No Yes Specific to the StorageWorks Core switch chassisShow No Yes Specific to the Storage...

Page 914: ...mand diagClearError Yes Yes diagCommandShow No Yes diagDisablePost Yes Yes diagEnablePost Yes Yes diagesdPorts No Yes diagfailLimit No Yes diagHelp Yes Yes diagloopid No Yes diagmodepr No Yes diagpost No Yes diagretry No Yes diagsetburnin No Yes diagsetcycle No Yes diagShow Yes Yes diagshowtime No Yes diagsilkworm No Yes diagskiptests No Yes diagstopburnin No Yes Table 25 Fabric OS Command Version...

Page 915: ...rtshow No Yes New command for V4 1 x fabretryshow Yes Yes New command fabricprincipal No Yes New command for V4 1 x fabricshow No Yes New command for V4 1 x fabstateclear No Yes New command for V4 1 x fabStateShow No Yes fabstatsshow Yes Yes New command for V4 1 x fabswitchshow No Yes New command for V4 1 x fanDisable No Yes fanEnable No Yes fanshow Yes Yes faShow Yes No New command for V3 1 x fas...

Page 916: ...x filterTest Yes Yes firmwareCommit No Yes New command for V4 1 x firmwareDownload Yes Yes firmwaredownloadstatus No Yes New command for V4 1 x firmwareRestore No Yes firmwareshow No Yes New command for V4 1 x fporttest Yes No New command for V3 1 x fspfShow Yes Yes fwAlarmsFilterSet Yes Yes fwAlarmsFilterShow Yes Yes fwClassInit Yes Yes fwConfigReload Yes Yes fwConfigure Yes Yes fwFruCfg No Yes f...

Page 917: ...eWorks Core switch hasyncstart No Yes New command for V4 1 x hasyncstop No Yes New command for V4 1 x help Yes Yes historyLastShow No Yes historymode No Yes New command for V4 1 x historyShow No Yes i Yes Yes ifModeSet Yes Yes ifModeShow Yes Yes ifShow Yes No interfaceShow Yes Yes iodReset Yes Yes iodSet Yes Yes iodShow Yes Yes ipAddrSet Yes Yes ipAddrShow Yes Yes This command displays unique info...

Page 918: ...ost Yes Yes login Yes Yes logout Yes Yes loopporttest Yes Yes LSDbShow Yes Yes mcastShow Yes No memshow Yes Yes msCapabilityShow Yes Yes msConfigure Yes Yes msPlatShow Yes Yes msPlClearDB Yes Yes msPlMgmtActivate Yes Yes msPlMgmtDeactivate Yes Yes msTdDisable Yes Yes msTdEnable Yes Yes msTdReadConfig No Yes myid No Yes nbrStatsClear Yes Yes nbrStateShow Yes Yes nodefind Yes Yes New command Table 2...

Page 919: ...nitor Yes Yes perfAddRWMonitor Yes Yes perfAddSCSIMonitor Yes Yes perfAddUserMonitor Yes Yes perfAddWriteMonitor Yes Yes perfCfgClear Yes Yes perfCfgRestore Yes Yes perfCfgSave Yes Yes perfcleareemonitor Yes Yes New command perfclearfiltermonitor Yes Yes New command perfClrAlpaCrc Yes Yes perfDelEEMonitor Yes Yes perfDelFilterMonitor Yes Yes perfHelp Yes Yes perfSetPortEEMask Yes Yes perfShowAlpaC...

Page 920: ...mand portCfgLongDistance Yes Yes portCfgLport Yes Yes portcfgpersistentdisable Yes Yes New command portcfgpersistentenable Yes Yes New command portCfgShow Yes Yes portCfgSpeed Yes Yes portCfgTrunkport Yes Yes portdebug Yes Yes New command portDisable Yes Yes portEnable Yes Yes portErrShow Yes Yes portflagshow Yes Yes New command portLEDtest No Yes portLogClear Yes Yes portLogDump Yes Yes portLogDu...

Page 921: ...apdisable No Yes New command for V4 1 x portswapenable No Yes New command for V4 1 x portswapshow No Yes New command for V4 1 x porttest Yes Yes New command porttestshow Yes Yes New command powerOffListSet No Yes New command for V4 1 x powerOffListShow No Yes New command for V4 1 x psShow Yes Yes ptdatashow No Yes ptphantomshow No Yes ptpropshow No Yes ptregshow No Yes ptrouteshow No Yes ptstatssh...

Page 922: ...re No Yes New command for V4 1 x secfabricshow Yes Yes New command secfcsfailover Yes Yes New command sechelp Yes Yes New command secmodedisable Yes Yes New command secmodeenable Yes Yes New command secmodeshow Yes Yes New command secnonfcspasswd Yes Yes New command secpolicyabort Yes Yes New command secpolicyactivate Yes Yes New command secpolicyadd Yes Yes New command secpolicycreate Yes Yes New...

Page 923: ...es Yes New command sensorShow Yes Yes setdbg Yes Yes New command setesdmode No Yes setgbicmode Yes Yes setSfpMode No Yes setSplbMode Yes Yes setverbose Yes Yes sfpShow Yes Yes slotOff No Yes Specific to the StorageWorks Core switch slotOn No Yes Specific to the StorageWorks Core switch slotpoweroff No Yes Specific to the StorageWorks Core switch slotpoweron No Yes Specific to the StorageWorks Core...

Page 924: ...isable Yes Yes switchEnable Yes Yes switchName Yes Yes switchReboot No Yes Reboots the current logical switch in StorageWorks Core switch switchShow Yes Yes switchShutdown No Yes Specific to the StorageWorks Core switch switchStart No Yes Specific to the StorageWorks Core switch switchStatusPolicySet Yes Yes switchStatusPolicyShow Yes Yes switchStatusShow Yes Yes switchuptime No Yes syslogdIpAdd Y...

Page 925: ...mand tshelp Yes Yes New command tstimezone Yes Yes New command turboRamTest Yes Yes txdpathtest Yes No New command for V3 1 x uptime Yes Yes uRouteConfig Yes Yes Addition of the area parameter uRouteRemove Yes Yes Addition of the area parameter uRouteShow Yes Yes version Yes Yes wwn Yes Yes zoneAdd Yes Yes Specify members using area number in V4 1 x zoneCreate Yes Yes Specify members using area nu...

Page 926: ...ersion 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide zoneHelp Yes Yes zoneRemove Yes Yes Specify members using area number in V4 1 x zoneShow Yes Yes Table 25 Fabric OS Command Version Support Sheet 15 of 15 Command Supported in V3 1 x Supported in V4 1 x Comment ...

Page 927: ...ge an HP StorageWorks SAN switch In order to manage a switch you must have access to one of the available management methods Overview page 928 User Access Level page 929 Fabric OS Command Line Interface page 930 Web Tools page 931 Fabric Manager page 932 Fabric Watch page 934 Fabric OS Access Layer API page 935 Management Server page 936 ...

Page 928: ...out of band or from Fibre Channel in band The switch must be configured with an IP address to allow for the network connection Refer to the hardware manual for your specific switch for information on physically connecting to the switch Before changing any of the factory default settings become familiar with the operations described in this chapter including both the switch functions and interactiv...

Page 929: ...only a single session per management access method regardless of user level Switches can however be accessed simultaneously from different connections for example through the CLI and Web Tools If this happens changes from one connection may not be updated to the other and some changes may be lost Make sure when connecting with simultaneous multiple connections that you do not overwrite the work of...

Page 930: ...unlock certain features Generally speaking all configuration and management tasks are available using the admin or user level ID The root and factory levels should be used with caution This manual lists all the commands available to the user and admin level login IDs Fabric OS CLI is the complete fabric management tool for HP SANs and provides the following advantages to administrators Access to t...

Page 931: ...s that make Web Tools an important part of the switch management and administration process Web Tools can be used simultaneously with Fabric OS CLI commands Simply open a second window and you can take advantage of the benefits of both interfaces at the same time Web Tools can help you find the appropriate Fabric OS CLI command to perform a desired function For instance you can perform a function ...

Page 932: ...agement power tool for HP SANs and provides the following advantages to administrators Provides a highly scalable Java based application that manages multiple switches and multiple fabrics up to 8 in real time Assists SAN administrators with the configuration monitoring dynamic provisioning and daily management of Storage Area Networks Lowers the cost of SAN ownership by intuitively facilitating S...

Page 933: ...e Fabric OS SANs through a single encrypted console Provides the ability to implement scalable SAN management tasks through functionality and tools that intelligently span 8 fabrics and 200 switches Provides the ability to monitor Inter Switch Links ISLs Provides the ability to manage switch licenses Provides the ability to perform Fabric Stamping ...

Page 934: ...nitor any of the following Fabric events such as topology re configurations and zone changes Physical switch conditions such as fans power supplies and temperature Port behavior such as state changes errors and performance SFPs behavior With Fabric Watch software SAN managers can place limits or thresholds on the behavior of different switch and fabric elements Fabric Watch then monitors these beh...

Page 935: ...es any application to access critical information about an HP SAN With Fabric Access an application can query or control individual switches or the entire fabric The Fabric OS Access Layer has the following advantages Ability to use third party software to manage an HP fabric Ability to create SAN management applications specific to your needs using the tools available in the Fabric OS ...

Page 936: ... This interface runs directly over Fibre Channel through the HBA An ACL of WWN addresses determines which systems have access to the Management Server database If the list is empty default the Management Server is accessible to all systems connected in band to the Fabric For a more secured access an administrator may specify WWNs in the ACL These WWNs are usually associated with the management app...

Page 937: ...1 x Reference Guide 5 Control Processor Commands This chapter lists the commands that may be available depending upon the Fabric OS version V3 1 x or V4 1 x when logged into the Active CP and Standby CP in a StorageWorks Core switch ...

Page 938: ...t you log into a specific logical switch when performing management functions rather than the Active CP This method guarantees that any commands you execute are run on the desired logical switch When you open a telnet session to the Active CP IP Address commands execute by default on logical switch 0 When you open a connection through the Console or Modem port a prompt requires you to specify whic...

Page 939: ...th page breaks fastboot Reboot switch bypassing the POST firmwarecommit Commit firmware to stable storage firmwaredownload Download firmware into the switch firmwaredownloadstatus Display the progress and status of firmwaredownload firmwarerestore Restore previous firmware into the switch firmwareshow Display firmware versions in the switch h Display shell history hashow Display high availability ...

Page 940: ...n executed from the Standby CP only the Standby CP is rebooted savecore FTP or Remove core files generated by daemons timeout Set or display the idle timeout value for a login session uptime Display how long switch has been up version Display firmware version information Table 27 StorageWorks Core switch Standby CP Commands Continued Command Notes ...

Page 941: ...941 Fabric OS Version 3 1 x 4 1 x Reference Guide 6 Security Commands This chapter summarizes the commands that are only available on the Primary FCS when the security feature is installed and enabled ...

Page 942: ...mary FCS switch cfgclear Must be run from the Primary FCS switch cfgcreate Must be run from the Primary FCS switch cfgdelete Must be run from the Primary FCS switch cfgdisable Must be run from the Primary FCS switch cfgenable Must be run from the Primary FCS switch cfgremove Must be run from the Primary FCS switch cfgsave Must be run from the Primary FCS switch cfgshow Must be run from the Primary...

Page 943: ...FCS switch secfabricshow Must be run from the Primary FCS switch secmodedisable Must be run from the Primary FCS switch secnonfcspasswd Must be run from the Primary FCS switch secpolicyabort Must be run from the Primary FCS switch secpolicyactivate Must be run from the Primary FCS switch secpolicyadd Must be run from the Primary FCS switch secpolicycreate Must be run from the Primary FCS switch se...

Page 944: ...switch wwn This command can be run on all switches to view the WWN With security enabled the WWN of a switch cannot be modified zoneadd Must be run from the Primary FCS switch zonecreate Must be run from the Primary FCS switch zonedelete Must be run from the Primary FCS switch zoneremove Must be run from the Primary FCS switch zoneshow Must be run from the Primary FCS switch Table 28 Commands Excl...

Page 945: ... specific switch port or set of ports preventing a port in another physical location from assuming the identity of a real WWN May also refer to a list of the Read Write access of a particular community string See also device connection controls Account Level Switches Refers to switches that have four login accounts into the operating system in descending order root factory admin and user See also ...

Page 946: ...cast group management ANSI American National Standards Institute The governing body for Fibre Channel standards in the U S A API Application Programming Interface Defined protocol that allows applications to interface with a set of services Arbitrated Loop A shared 100 or 200 MBps Fibre Channel transport structured as a loop Can support up to 126 devices and one fabric attachment See also topology...

Page 947: ...switch The switch or switches assigned as backup in case the primary FCS switch fails See also FCS switch primary FCS switch Bandwidth The total transmission capacity of a cable link or system Usually measured in bps bits per second May also refer to the range of transmission frequencies available to a network See also throughput BB_Credit Buffer to buffer credit The number of frames that can be t...

Page 948: ...nes See also BIST CMBISR BIST Built In Self Test The technique of designing circuits with additional logic which can be used to test proper operation of the primary functional logic See also BISR CMBISR Bit Synchronization See BER Blade See 16 port card Blind mate Connector A two way connector used in some switches to provide a connection between the motherboard and the power supply Block As appli...

Page 949: ...maximum of seven interswitch links no path longer than eight switches See also fabric ISL Chassis The metal frame in which the switch and switch components are mounted Circuit An established communication path between two ports Consists of two virtual circuits capable of transmitting in opposite directions See also link Class 1 Service that provides a dedicated connection between two ports also ca...

Page 950: ...tly communicating on the loop to close communication to an other L_Port CMBISR Central Memory Built In Self Repair Test and repair bad cells in the central memory If a fail is reported inform Tech Support and replace the board See also BIST BISR Comma A unique pattern either 1100000 or 0011111 used in 8b 10b encoding to specify character alignment within a data stream See also K28 5 Community SNMP...

Page 951: ...recipient Connection Recipient A port that has received a Class 1 dedicated connection request and transmitted a response to the originator Control Panel Refers to the left side panel of Web Tools which accesses fabric wide functions such as Zoning and Events Core Switch A switch whose main task is to interconnect other switches See also SAN switch CP Card Control Processor Card The central proces...

Page 952: ...nsist of data words See also frame ordered set transmission word DB 9 connector A 9 pin version of the RS 232C port interface May be either the male of female interface See also RS 232 port dBm Logarithmic unit of power used in electronics Indicates signal strength in decibels above the reference level which is 1 milliwatt for dBm An increase of 10 dBm or represents a 10 fold increase in power DCE...

Page 953: ...en 1 and 239 that identifies the switch to the fabric and is used in routing frames Usually automatically assigned by the switch but can be manually assigned DTE port A data terminal equipment port capable of interfacing to a transmission circuit through a connection to a DCE data communications equipment port DTE devices with an RS 232 or EIA 232 port interface transmit on pin 3 and receive on pi...

Page 954: ... Extra Long Wavelength Laser light with a periodic length greater than 1300 nm e g 1420 or 1550 ELWL lasers are used to transmit Fibre Channel data over distances greater than 10 Km Also known as XLWL Enabled Zone Configuration The currently enabled zone configuration Only one configuration can be enabled at a time See also defined zone configuration zone configuration End to end Flow Control Gove...

Page 955: ...ts and devices May also be referred to as a switched fabric See also topology SAN cascade Fabric Access An HP product that consists of a set of APIs that allow third party applications to interface with Fabric OS Fabric Access allows the application to control the fabric directly for functions such as discovery access zoning management performance and switch control Consists of a host based librar...

Page 956: ...ws monitoring and configuration of fabric and switch elements Allows the SAN manager to monitor key fabric and switch elements making it easy to quickly identify and escalate potential problems It monitors each element for out of boundary values or counters and provides notification when defined boundaries are exceeded The SAN manager can configure which elements such as error status and performan...

Page 957: ...ices on a private loop FCS switch Fabric configuration server switch One or more designated HP switches that store and manage the configuration and security parameters for all switches in the fabric FCS switches are designated by WWN and the list of designated switches is communicated fabric wide See also backup FCS switch primary FCS switch FC SW 2 The second generation of the Fibre Channel Switc...

Page 958: ...ic Login The process by which an N_Port determines whether a fabric is present and if so exchanges service parameters with it See also PLOGI Frame The Fibre Channel structure used to transmit data between ports Consists of a start of frame delimiter header any optional headers the data payload a cyclic redundancy check CRC and an end of frame delimiter There are two types of frames Link control fr...

Page 959: ...on protocol for all fabric services transparent to the fabric type or topology See also FS Full Fabric The HP license that allows multiple E_Ports on a switch making it possible to create multiple ISL links Full duplex A mode of communication that allows the same port to simultaneously transmit and receive frames See also half duplex Fx_Port A fabric port that can operate as either an F_Port or FL...

Page 960: ... loop initialization Hardware Translative Mode A method for achieving address translation The following two hardware translative modes are available to a QuickLoop enabled switch Standard Translative Mode Allows public devices to communicate with private devices that are directly connected to the fabric QuickLoop Mode Allows initiator devices to communicate with private or public devices that are ...

Page 961: ...and defines a new channel based switched fabric technology for server to server and server to I O interconnection that is expected to improve scalability and performance over existing PCI Bus technologies Idle Continuous transmission of an ordered set over a Fibre Channel link when no data is being transmitted to keep the link active and maintain bit byte and word synchronization InfiniBand See IB...

Page 962: ...ng port See also Master Port IU Information Unit A set of information as defined by either upper level process protocol definition or upper level protocol mapping JBOD Just a Bunch Of Disks Indicates a number of disks connected in a single chassis to one or more controllers See also RAID K28 5 A special 10 bit character used to indicate the beginning of a transmission word that performs Fibre Chan...

Page 963: ...e Used on HP switches to indicate the status of various switch elements Link Services A protocol for link related actions Link As applies to Fibre Channel a physical connection between two ports consisting of both transmit and receive fibers See also Circuit LIP Loop Initialization Primitive The signal used to begin initialization in a loop Indicates either loop failure or resetting of a node LIS_...

Page 964: ... Loop Port State Machine The logical entity that performs arbitrated loop protocols and defines the behavior of L_Ports when they require access to an arbitrated loop LWL Long Wavelength A type of fiber optic cabling that is based on 1300 mm lasers and supports link speeds of 1 0625 Gbps May also refer to the type of GBIC or SFP See also SWL Master Port As relates to trunking the port that determi...

Page 965: ...also broadcast unicast Multimode A fiber optic cabling specification that allows up to 500 meters between devices for 1 Gb or 300 meters between devices for 2 Gb N_Port Node Port A port on a node that can connect to a Fibre Channel port or to another N_Port in a point to point connection See also NL_Port Nx_Port NAA Network Address Authority An identifier that indicates the format of a network add...

Page 966: ... or send frames but can retransmit any received transmissions This mode is entered if there are more than 127 devices in a loop and an AL_PA cannot be acquired See also L_Port Participating Mode Nx_Port A node port that can operate as either an N_Port or NL_Port Open Originator The L_Port that wins arbitration in an arbitrated loop and sends an OPN ordered set to the destination port then enters t...

Page 967: ... and can arbitrate send frames and retransmit received transmissions See also L_Port Non participating Mode Path Selection The selection of a transmission path through the fabric HP StorageWorks switches use the FSPF protocol Performance Monitor Comprehensive HP tool for monitoring the performance of networked storage resources Performance Monitoring An HP product that provides error and performan...

Page 968: ...nicated during login and port discovery POST Power On Self Test A series of tests run by a switch after it is turned on Primary FCS Switch Primary fabric configuration server switch The switch that actively manages the configuration and security parameters for all switches in the fabric See also backup FCS switch FCS switch Private Device A device that supports arbitrated loop protocol and can int...

Page 969: ... also refer to the arbitrated loop created using this software A QuickLoop can contain a number of devices or looplets all devices in the same QuickLoop share a single AL_PA space A means of allowing private hosts to communicate with private targets across a switched fabric The QuickLoop Fabric Assist feature also allows Private hosts to communicate with public targets across a switched fabric Pri...

Page 970: ... servicing entity See also service rate RLS Probing Read link status of the AL_PAs Root Account A login used for debugging purposes by HP engineers and is not intended for customer use See also account level switches Route As applies to a fabric the communication path between two switches May also apply to the specific path taken by an individual frame from source to destination See also FSPF Rout...

Page 971: ... into the fabric See also core switch SCSI Small Computer Systems Interface A parallel bus architecture and protocol for transmitting large data blocks to a distance of 15 25 meters SDRAM Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory The main memory for the switch Used for volatile storage during switch operation See also flash Sequence A group of related frames transmitted in the same direction betwee...

Page 972: ...equence Initiative SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol An internet management protocol that uses either IP for network level functions and UDP for transport level functions or TCP IP for both Can be made available over other protocols such as UDP IP because it does not rely on the underlying communication protocols See also Community SNMP SNMPv1 The original SNMP now labeled v1 SNS Simple Name...

Page 973: ...wer serial port on the CP Card of the StorageWorks Core switch This port sends switch information messages and can receive commands Can be used to connect the CP Card to a computer terminal Has an RS 232 connector wired as a DTE device and can be connected by serial cable to a DCE device The connector pins two and three are swapped so that a straight through cable can be used to connect to a termi...

Page 974: ...group of four transmission characters See also data word Trap SNMP The message sent by an SNMP agent to inform the SNMP management station of a critical error See also SNMP Trunking See ISL Trunking Tunneling A technique for enabling two networks to communicate when the source and destination hosts are both on the same type of network but are connected by a different type of network U_Port Univers...

Page 975: ... switches or entire fabrics from a standard workstation running a browser Well known Address As pertaining to Fibre Channel a logical address defined by the Fibre Channel standards as assigned to a specific function and stored on the switch Workstation A computer used to access and manage the fabric May also be referred to as a management station or host WWN World Wide Name An identifier that is u...

Page 976: ...ee also alias Zone Configuration A specified set of zones Enabling a configuration enables all zones in that configuration See also defined zone configuration enabled zone configuration Zone Member A port node WWN or alias which is part of a zone Zone Schemes The level of zoning granularity selected For example zoning may be done by switch port WWN AL_PA or a mixture See also zone configuration Zo...

Page 977: ...n 68 bladediag 70 bladediagshort 73 bladedisable 77 bladeenable 79 bladePropShow 81 broadcast zone 889 bsn 83 C camTest 84 centralMemoryTest 87 cfgactvshow 95 cfgAdd 97 cfgClear 99 cfgCreate 101 cfgDelete 103 cfgDisable 105 cfgEnable 107 cfgRemove 109 cfgSave 111 cfgShow 113 cfgsize 117 cfgTransAbort 119 cfgtransshow 121 chassisName 123 chassisShow 125 chippropshow 128 chipregshow 130 cmemRetentio...

Page 978: ...LogSizeSet 227 errNvLogSizeShow 229 errSaveLvlSet 230 errSaveLvlShow 232 errShow 233 exit 239 F fabportshow 240 fabretryshow 243 fabricprincipal 245 fabricShow 247 fabstateclear 249 fabstateshow 250 fabStatsShow 252 fabswitchshow 254 fanDisable 256 fanEnable 257 fanShow 259 fashow 261 faStatsShow 264 fastboot 266 fazoneAdd 268 fazoneCreate 270 fazoneDelete 274 fazoneRemove 276 fazoneShow 278 fcppr...

Page 979: ...set 376 iodSet 378 iodShow 380 ipAddrSet 381 ipAddrShow 385 islshow 388 itemlist 389 K killtelnet 392 L ledtest 395 licenseAdd 396 licenseHelp 398 licenseIdShow 400 licenseRemove 402 licenseShow 404 linkCost 406 login 409 logout 410 loopPortTest 412 LSDbShow 418 M mcastShow 422 memshow 424 mscapabilityshow 426 msConfigure 429 msPlatShow 432 msPlClearDB 434 msPlMgmtActivate 436 msPlMgmtDeactivate 4...

Page 980: ...cfgpersistentdisable 549 551 portCfgShow 553 portCfgSpeed 556 portCfgTrunkport 558 portdebug 560 portDisable 561 portEnable 563 portErrShow 565 portflagsshow 567 portLEDTest 569 portLogClear 571 portLogDump 573 portLogDumpPort 576 portloginshow 579 portlogpdisc 581 portLogShow 582 portlogshowport 585 portLoopbackTest 587 portname 592 portPerfShow 594 portRegTest 596 portRouteShow 600 portShow 603 ...

Page 981: ...ity feature for primary FCS 941 secversionreset 743 sensorShow 745 setdbg 747 setesdmode 748 setgbicmode 750 setsfpmode 752 setSplbMode 754 setverbose 756 sfpShow 757 slotOff 760 slotOn 761 slotPowerOff 762 slotPowerOn 763 slotShow 764 snmpMibCapSet 766 spinFab 768 spinSilk 775 sramRetentionTest 784 ssn 787 statsTest 789 stopporttest 792 supportShow 794 switchBeacon 800 switchcfgpersistentdisable ...

Page 982: ...sShow 856 trunkDebug 857 trunkShow 859 tsclockserver 861 tshelp 863 tstimezone 864 turboRamTest 866 txdpathtest 870 U uptime 873 uRouteConfig 875 uRouteRemove 877 uRouteShow 879 V version 882 W websites Fibre Channel Association 16 HP storage 19 StorageWorks 16 wwn 884 Z zoneAdd 886 zoneCreate 888 zoneDelete 891 zoneHelp 893 zoneRemove 895 zoneShow 897 ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for StorageWorks MSA 2/8 - SAN Switch

Campbell SC115 Product Manual preview
SC115
Brand: Campbell Pages: 32
Edirol DV-HD60 Owner'S Manual preview
DV-HD60
Brand: Edirol Pages: 1
Seagate HAWK 2 ST11900W Installation Manual preview
HAWK 2 ST11900W
Brand: Seagate Pages: 40
Seagate ST3250621NS Product Manual preview
ST3250621NS
Brand: Seagate Pages: 54
POCKetec POCKEY User Manual preview
POCKEY
Brand: POCKetec Pages: 19
OpenEye OE-GRANITE3U User Manual preview
OE-GRANITE3U
Brand: OpenEye Pages: 101
GARANT GridLine 930505 Instruction Manual preview
GridLine 930505
Brand: GARANT Pages: 116
OWC RACK PRO MINI-SAS Assembly Manual & User Manual preview
RACK PRO MINI-SAS
Brand: OWC Pages: 12
Backyard YardLine ASTON Assembly Manual preview
YardLine ASTON
Brand: Backyard Pages: 60
Hama Save2Data SecureKey Operating Instructions Manual preview
Save2Data SecureKey
Brand: Hama Pages: 38
SANHO iUSBPORTHD User Manual preview
iUSBPORTHD
Brand: SANHO Pages: 24
ADDC SR10-FDD User Manual preview
SR10-FDD
Brand: ADDC Pages: 26
Seagate SkyHawk AI ST10000VE001 Product Manual preview
SkyHawk AI ST10000VE001
Brand: Seagate Pages: 32
I-O DATA HDC-UXW Setup Manual preview
HDC-UXW
Brand: I-O DATA Pages: 2
Addonics Technologies ST45HPMXA-B User Manual preview
ST45HPMXA-B
Brand: Addonics Technologies Pages: 8
NewerTech miniStack Assembly Manual & User Manual preview
miniStack
Brand: NewerTech Pages: 12
Pioneer CNSD-300FM Upgrade Instructions And Operation Manual Addendum preview
CNSD-300FM
Brand: Pioneer Pages: 32
Samsung SN-324 User Manual preview
SN-324
Brand: Samsung Pages: 5

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands